Professional Documents
Culture Documents
2010 Subaru Outback 88559
2010 Subaru Outback 88559
1) Legacy
2) Outback
1
– CONTINUED –
2
You will find a circle with a slash through it GAWR Gross axle weight rating
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do GPS Global positioning system
result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this GVW Gross vehicle weight
happen”, depending upon the context.
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
3
Illumination brightness
Seat heater
Engine hood
Child restraint lower an-
chorages
Trunk lid (Legacy)
Child restraint top tether an-
chorages
– CONTINUED –
4
. The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety with considerable speed and
considerable speed and force. force and can injure or even kill
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING children, especially if they are
position when the SRS airbag not restrained or improperly re-
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults,
needs enough space for deploy- moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from
ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater.
sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen- FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi- THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
maintaining full vehicle control cle. RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in- DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
move the seat as far back as fants and small children should CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint . Always turn the child safety locks
system which is appropriate for to the “LOCK” position whenever
For instructions and precautions, carefully the child’s age, height and
read the following sections. a child rides in the rear seat.
weight. If a child is too big for a Serious injury could result if a
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- child restraint system, the child child accidentally opened the
belts” F1-12. should sit in the REAR seat and door and fell out. Refer to “Child
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts. safety locks” F2-20.
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
System airbag)” F1-38. children are safer when properly . Always lock the passengers’ win-
restrained in the rear seating dows using the lock switch when
positions than in the front seat- children are riding in the vehicle.
ing positions. Never allow a child Failure to follow this procedure
to stand up or kneel on the seat. could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
. Put children in the REAR seat fer to “Windows” F2-21.
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a . Never leave unattended children,
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys adults or animals in the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
6
They could accidentally injure System airbag)” F1-38. . If at any time you suspect that
themselves or others through exhaust fumes are entering the
inadvertent operation of the ve- & Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, monoxide) checked and corrected as soon
the temperature in a closed ve- as possible. If you must drive
hicle could quickly become high WARNING under these conditions, drive
enough to cause severe or pos- only with all windows fully open.
sibly fatal injuries. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
. Help prevent children, adults or Engine exhaust gas contains closed while driving to prevent
animals from locking themselves carbon monoxide, a colorless exhaust gas from entering the
in the trunk. On hot or sunny and odorless gas which is dan- vehicle.
days, the temperature in the gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
trunk could quickly become high . Always properly maintain the en-
enough to cause death or serious gine exhaust system to prevent & Drinking and driving
heat-related injuries including engine exhaust gas from enter-
brain damage to anyone locked ing the vehicle. WARNING
inside, particularly for small chil- . Never run the engine in a closed
dren. space, such as a garage, except Drinking and then driving is very
. When leaving the vehicle, close for the brief time needed to drive dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
all windows and lock all doors. the vehicle in or out of it. stream delays your reaction and
Also make certain that the trunk impairs your perception, judgment
. Avoid remaining in a parked and attentiveness. If you drive after
is closed. vehicle for a lengthy time while drinking – even if you drink just a
the engine is running. If that is little – it will increase the risk of
For instructions and precautions, carefully unavoidable, then use the venti-
read the following sections. being involved in a serious or fatal
lation fan to force fresh air into accident, injuring or killing yourself,
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- the vehicle.
belts” F1-12. your passengers and others. In
. Always keep the front ventilator addition, if you are injured in the
. For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves accident, alcohol may increase the
“Child restraint systems” F1-25. or other obstructions to ensure severity of that injury.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to that the ventilation system al-
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint ways works properly.
7
Please don’t drink and drive. after taking any medications that can driving with others.
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
Drunken driving is one of the most ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If & Car phone/cell phone and
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- you have a medical condition that requires driving
hol affects all people differently, you may you to take drugs, please consult with
have consumed too much alcohol to drive your doctor. CAUTION
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
Never drive if you are under the influence
blood is below the legal limit. The safest Do not use a car phone/cell phone
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
thing you can do is never drink and drive. while driving; it may distract your
own health and well-being, we urge you
However if you have no choice but to attention from driving and can lead
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- to an accident. If you use a car
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
tely before getting behind the wheel. phone/cell phone, pull off the road
to those drugs.
and park in a safe place before
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
WARNING may legally be used while driving.
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
When you are tired or sleepy, your
counter and prescription) that can
reaction will be delayed and your
delay your reaction time and impair
perception, judgment and attentive-
your perception, judgment and at-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
when tired or sleepy, your, your
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
chances of being involved in a
of being involved in a serious or
serious accident may increase.
fatal accident.
Please do not continue to drive but
If you are taking any drugs, check with
instead find a safe place to rest if you
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
literature that accompanies the medication
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
to determine if the drug you are taking can
yourself before continuing on your journey.
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
When possible, you should share the
– CONTINUED –
8
& Modification of your vehicle in the front passenger’s seat. For further & California proposition 65
information, consult your veterinarian, warning
CAUTION local animal protection society or pet
shop. WARNING
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU & Tire pressures Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
parts and accessories. Other types tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
of modifications could affect its WARNING nents contain or emit chemicals
performance, safety or durability, known to the State of California to
and may even violate governmental Driving at high speeds with exces- cause cancer and birth defects or
regulations. In addition, damage or sively low tire pressures can cause other reproductive harm. In addi-
performance problems resulting the tires to deform severely and to tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
from modification may not be cov- rapidly become hot. A sharp in- certain components of product wear
ered under warranties. crease in temperature could cause contain or emit chemicals known to
tread separation, and destruction of the State of California to cause
the tires. The resulting loss of cancer and birth defects or other
& Driving with pets vehicle control could lead to an reproductive harm.
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your accident.
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop, Check and, if necessary, adjust the
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown pressure of each tire (including the spare)
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or at least once a month and before any long
your passengers. Besides, the pets can journey.
be hurt under these situations. It is also for Check the tire pressure when the tires are
their own safety that pets should be cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- tire pressures to the values shown on the
strain a pet with a special traveling tire placard. For detailed information, refer
harness which can be secured to the rear to “Tires and wheels” F11-35.
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
Table of contents
– CONTINUED –
12
– CONTINUED –
14
1) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-16)/Select lever
(AT and CVT) (page 7-19)
2) Climate control (page 4-1)
3) Audio (page 5-1)
4) Navigation system (Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system)
5) Multi function display (page 3-24)
6) Glove box (page 6-6)
7) Cup holder (page 6-8)
15
– CONTINUED –
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-31)
2) Mist (page 3-32)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-33)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-34)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-33)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-32)
7) Light control switch (page 3-27)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-30)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-27)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-28)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-29)
17
& Combination meter 1) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-6)
! U.S.-spec. models 2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Multi function display switching knob
(page 3-24)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-13)
8) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
– CONTINUED –
18
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page / Brake system warning 3-17 Front fog light indicator 3-23
light light (if equipped)
Seatbelt warning light 3-10
Hill Holder indicator 3-19 Cruise control indicator 3-23
light light
Front passenger’s 3-10
seatbelt warning light Cruise control set indi-
Door open warning light 3-20 cator light 3-23
SRS airbag system 3-11
warning light Door open indicator
light 3-20 Headlight indicator light 3-23
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in- 3-12 Low tire pressure
dicator lamp Low fuel warning light 3-19 warning light 3-15
Coolant temperature (U.S.-spec. models)
low indicator light/Cool- 3-13 All-Wheel Drive warn- Front passenger’s fron-
ant temperature high ing light (AT and CVT 3-20 ON / tal airbag ON indicator 1-46/
warning light models) light 3-12
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-16
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only models Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-18
Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light ON/OFF OFF 2-16
illumination
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-11
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-34
for models with the automatic defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation
climate control system
Map light/Dome light/Cargo Operation of map light/Dome light/Cargo OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-2
area light area light OFF delay timer
Battery drainage prevention Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6
function
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 1-14
Auto on/off headlights Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/ Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal 3-28
off headlights
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s & Power seat (if equipped) ! Driver’s seat
seat)
– CONTINUED –
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
To remove: Seat heater (if equipped) The seat heater operates when the igni-
While pressing the release button, pull out tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON”
the head restraint. position.
To install: To turn on the seat heater, press the
Install the head restraint into the holes that “LOW” or “HIGH” position on the switch,
are located on the top of the seatback until as desired, depending on the tempera-
the head restraint locks. ture.
Selecting the “HIGH” position will cause
WARNING the seat to heat up quicker.
. Never drive the vehicle with the To turn off the seat heater, slightly press
head restraints removed because the opposite side of the current position.
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the The indicator located on the switch illumi-
event that the vehicle is struck nates when the seat heater is in operation.
from the rear. Therefore, when When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
you remove the head restraints, enough or before you leave the vehicle,
you must reinstall all head re- be sure to turn the switch off.
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants. CAUTION
. All occupants, including the dri- . There is a possibility that people
ver, should not operate a vehicle with delicate skin may suffer
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the slight burns even at low tempera-
head restraints are placed in their tures if they use the seat heater
proper positions in order to mini- for a long period of time. When
mize the risk of neck injury in the using the heater, always be sure
event of a collision. to warn the persons concerned.
1) HIGH – Rapid heating
2) LOW – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
WARNING
higher than the top of the seatback
Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and
straint when the occupant sits well injure passengers in the event of a
back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident.
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
– CONTINUED –
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Reclining the seatback (Out- cargo area cover when you re- & Folding down the rear seat-
back) cline the rear seat. back
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the WARNING
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car- . After returning the rear seat to its
go area cover” F6-15. original position, be certain to
place all of the seatbelts and the
tab attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. And
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
WARNING death.
. Secure all objects and especially
To prevent the passenger from slid-
long items properly to prevent
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
them from being thrown around
a collision, always put the seatback
inside the vehicle and causing
in the upright position while the Pull the lever and adjust the seatback to serious injury during a sudden
vehicle is in motion. the desired position. stop, a sudden steering maneu-
Then release the lever and make sure the ver or a rapid acceleration.
CAUTION seatback is securely locked into place.
CAUTION ! Outback
! Legacy
CAUTION
Before folding down the rear seats,
make sure that no one is sitting and
nothing is placed on the rear seats. 1) Release lever
Otherwise, the seatback may fold 2. Pull the release lever on the side that Unlock the seatback by pulling the release
down suddenly and an unexpected you want to fold down. lever and then fold the seatback down.
accident may occur. 3. Fold the seatback down. To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
To fold down the seatback, perform the To return the seatback to its original into place and make sure that it is securely
following procedure. position, raise the seatback until it locks locked.
1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Opening into place and make sure that it is securely
the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-10 or “To open locked.
the trunk lid from inside” F2-24.
– CONTINUED –
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Head restraint adjustment ! Rear window side seating position that the center of the head restraint is
Both the rear window side seats and the closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
rear center seat are equipped with head When the seats are not occupied, lower
restraints. the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re- 1) Head restraint
straints to protect vehicle occu- 2) Release button
pants.
To raise:
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle Pull the head restraint up.
NOTE
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the To lower:
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove
head restraints are placed in their Push the head restraint down while or install the head restraint without
proper positions in order to mini- pressing the release button on the top of folding down the rear seatback. Fold
mize the risk of neck injury in the the seatback. down the rear seatback and then
event of a collision. To remove: remove or install the head restraint.
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
! Rear center seating position extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
CAUTION head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
A) When not used (retracted position) While pressing the release button, pull out
B) When used (extended position) the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
According to accident statistics, shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to & Emergency Locking Retrac-
children are safer when properly securely place the lap belt as low as tor (ELR)
restrained in the rear seating possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
positions than in the front seat- Locking Retractor (ELR).
ing positions. For instructions cannot be properly positioned, a child
and precautions concerning the restraint system should be used. Never The emergency locking retractor allows
child restraint system, refer to place the shoulder belt under the child’s normal body movement but the retractor
“Child restraint systems” F1-25. arm or behind the child’s back. locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
! Expectant mothers out of the retractor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front & Automatic/Emergency Lock-
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, ing Retractor (A/ELR)
side and curtain airbags deploys. Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
! Infants or small children matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Use a child restraint system that is Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
restraint systems” F1-25. ELR has an additional locking mode
! Children “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
If a child is too big for a child restraint mode” intended to secure a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
and be restrained using the seatbelts. out completely and is then retracted even
Expectant mothers also need to use the slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
are safer when properly restrained in the that position and the seatbelt cannot be
for specific recommendations. The lap belt extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as
seating positions. Never allow a child to will be heard which indicate the retractor
possible over the hips, not over the waist. functions as ALR. When the seatbelt is
stand up or kneel on the seat.
retracted fully, ALR mode is canceled.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to When securing a child restraint system on
the belt buckle to help provide a good the passengers’ seats, the seatbelt must
be changed over to the Automatic Locking
– CONTINUED –
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
turned ON next time, however, the If the seatbelt warning device for the front . Seatbelts provide maximum re-
complete sequence of the warning passenger’s seat does not function cor- straint when the occupant sits
operation resumes. For further details rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the well back and upright in the seat.
about canceling the warning operation, front passenger’s seat is empty or it is To reduce the risk of sliding
please contact your SUBARU dealer. deactivated even when the front passen- under the seatbelt in a collision,
If there is no passenger on the front ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), the front seatbacks should be
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning take the following actions. always used in the upright posi-
device for the front passenger’s seat will . Ensure that no article is placed on the tion while the vehicle is running.
be deactivated. The front passenger’s seat other than a child restraint system If the front seatbacks are not
occupant detection system monitors and the child occupant. used in the upright position in a
whether or not there is a passenger on . Ensure that there is no article left in the collision, the risk of sliding under
the front passenger’s seat. seatback pocket. the lap belt and of the lap belt
Observe the following precautions. Failure . Ensure that the backward-forward po- sliding up over the abdomen will
to do so may prevent the device from sition and seatback of front passenger’s increase, and both can result in
functioning correctly or cause the device seat are locked into place securely by serious internal injury or death.
to fail. moving the seat back and forth. (Models . Do not put cushions or any other
. Do not install any accessory such as a equipped with manual seats only) materials between occupants
table or TV onto the seatback. and seatbacks or seat cushions.
. Do not store a heavy load in the & Fastening the seatbelt If you do so, the risk of sliding
seatback pocket. under the lap belt and of the lap
WARNING belt sliding up over the abdomen
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
will increase, and both can result
place his/her hands or legs on the front
. Never use a belt that is twisted or in serious internal injury or
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
reversed. In an accident, this can death.
pull the seatback.
increase the risk or severity of
. Do not use front seats with their back- injury.
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of . Keep the lap belt as low as
them are not locked securely, adjust them possible on your hips. In a colli-
again. For the adjusting procedure, refer sion, this spreads the force of the
to “Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped lap belt over stronger hip bones
with manual seats only). instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
– CONTINUED –
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
belt anchor height seatbelt on Outback)
When wearing the seatbelts, make 1. Sit well back in the seat.
sure the shoulder portion of the
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
webbing does not pass over your
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
anchor to a lower position. Placing
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
the shoulder belt over the neck may
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
result in neck injury during sudden
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
braking or in a collision.
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
– CONTINUED –
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed 2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
object into the slot in the connector You should hold the webbing end and CAUTION
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push guide it back into the retractor while it is
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
up the seatbelt too quickly.
disconnect from the buckle. the recess and then insert the connector
Otherwise, the metal tongue
(tongue) plate into the slot.
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
– CONTINUED –
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Seatbelt maintenance Front seatbelt pretensioners small amount of smoke will be released.
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap These occurrences are normal and not
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
the belts because this could seriously fire in the vehicle.
affect their strength. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
including the webbing and all hardware locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, be pulled out and retracted and therefore
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. must be replaced.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor NOTE
damage is found.
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
CAUTION signed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
. Keep the belts free of polishes, roll-over accidents.
oils, chemicals and particularly The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- . The driver’s seat and passenger’s
battery acid. belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seat pretensioners and frontal airbag
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be operate simultaneously.
. Never attempt to make modifica- activated in the event of an accident . Pretensioners are designed to func-
tions or changes that will prevent involving a moderate to severe frontal tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
the seatbelt from operating prop- collision. event that a pretensioner is activated,
erly.
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor
replaced and only by an authorized
detects a certain predetermined amount of
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
force during a frontal collision, the front
belt retractor assemblies, use only
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the
genuine SUBARU parts.
retractor to take up the slack so that the
. If either front seatbelt does not
belt more effectively restrains the front
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
seat occupant.
a malfunction or activation of the
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
an operating noise will be heard and a dealer as soon as possible.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer The following components are monitored
reasons, consult your SUBARU
as soon as possible. by the indicator.
dealer.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge . Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
you to explain to the buyer that it has . Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him & System monitors . Airbag control module (including im-
to the contents of this section. pact sensors (all models) and rollover
sensors (Outback))
WARNING . Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (front passen-
. To obtain maximum protection, ger’s side)
occupants should sit in an up- . Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
right position with their seatbelts hand side)
properly fastened. Refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-12. . Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
. Do not modify, remove or strike . Side airbag module (driver’s side)
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area. . Side airbag module (front passenger’s
This could result in accidental side)
activation of the seatbelt preten- SRS airbag system warning light . Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel
sioners or could make the sys- house right-hand side)
A diagnostic system continually monitors
tem inoperative, possibly result- . Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt house left-hand side)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
pretensioners have no user-ser- seatbelt pretensioners share the control . Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
viceable parts. For required ser- module with the airbag system. Therefore, . Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
vicing of front seatbelt retractors if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt . Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
equipped with seatbelt preten- pretensioner, the SRS airbag system . Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
s i o n e r s , s e e y o u r n ea r e s t warning light will illuminate. The SRS ger’s side)
SUBARU dealer. airbag system warning light will show . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
. When discarding front seatbelt normal system operation by lighting for ger’s side)
retractor assemblies or scrap- approximately 6 seconds when the igni- . Front passenger’s occupant detection
– CONTINUED –
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
system weight sensor while driving sensors is located under the center
. Front passenger’s occupant detection console. If you need service or
control module repair in those areas or near the
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON & System servicing front seatbelt retractors, have an
and OFF indicator authorized SUBARU dealer perform
. All related wiring WARNING the work.
. Modification of the suspension Child restraint systems tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).
system or front end structure.
Children could be endangered in an
. Installation of a tire of different accident if their child restraints are not
size and construction from the properly secured in the vehicle. When
tires specified on the vehicle installing the child restraint system, care-
placard attached to the door fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
pillar or specified for individual
vehicle models in this Owner’s According to accident statistics, children
Manual. are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
Infants and small children should always moving.
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
– CONTINUED –
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys- CAUTION
system tems with A/ELR seatbelt
When you install a child restraint
WARNING system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
. Child restraint systems and seat- installing the child restraint system,
belts can become hot in a vehicle check to ensure that it is held
that has been closed up in sunny securely in position. If it is not held
weather; they could burn a small tight and secure, the danger of your
child. Check the child restraint child suffering personal injury in the
system before you place a child event of an accident may be in-
in it. creased.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. ! Installing a rearward facing child
Unsecured child restraint sys- restraint
Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
(weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
cle Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufacture’s statement of com-
pliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system
1. Place the child restraint system in the
is compatible with the vehicle in which it
rear seating position.
will be used.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system,
system forward and side to side to check press the release button on the seatbelt
if it is firmly secured in the center of the buckle and allow the belt to retract
seat. completely. The belt will return to the
Sometimes a child restraint can be more ELR mode.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. firmly secured by pushing it down into the
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the seat cushion and then tightening the WARNING
retractor to change the retractor over from seatbelt.
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind properly functioning). PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
clicks will be heard which indicate the TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
retractor functions as ALR. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before seating a child in the child
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and left and right to verify that it is
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) firmly secured in the center of the seat.
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Sometimes a child restraint can be more
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind firmly secured by pushing it down into the
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, seat cushion and then tightening the
clicks will be heard which indicate the seatbelt.
retractor functions as ALR. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
1. Place the child restraint system in the to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
rear seating position. properly functioning).
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
CAUTION following the instructions provided by its . Never place the shoulder belt
manufacturer. under the child’s arm or behind
When you install a child restraint 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle the child’s back. If an accident
system, follow the manufacturer’s until you hear a click. Take care not to occurs, this can increase the risk
instructions supplied with it. After twist the seatbelt. or severity of injury to the child.
installing the child restraint system, Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
check to ensure that it is held across the center of child’s shoulder and order to provide full restraint.
securely in position. If it is not held that the lap belt is positioned as low as Loose fitting belts are not as
tight and secure, the danger of your possible on the child’s hips. effective in preventing or redu-
child suffering personal injury in the cing injury.
event of an accident may be in-
. Place the lap belt as low as
creased.
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
4. To remove the booster seat, press the result in neck injury during sud-
release button on the seatbelt buckle and den braking or in a collision.
allow the belt to retract.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The WARNING
child should sit well back on the booster
seat. . Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
increase the risk or severity of
or around the booster seat and the child
injury to the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
& Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
Some types of child restraint systems can
. Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your
belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the
weather; they could burn a small dedicated anchorages provided on the
child. Check the child restraint vehicle body.
system before you place a child The lower and tether anchorages are
in it. sometimes referred to as the LATCH
. Do not leave an unsecured child system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
restraint system in your vehicle. CHildren). anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
Unsecured child restraint sys- chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
tems can be thrown around in- modating such child restraint systems.
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
securely in position. If it is not held installing a child restraint system only on
– CONTINUED –
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the rear seat window-side seating posi- rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate
tions. For each window-side seating posi- the positions of the lower anchorages
tion, two lower anchorages are provided. (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom. the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
Outback securely in position. If it is not held
The tether anchorages (upper an- tight and secure, the danger of your
chorages) are provided for all the seating child suffering personal injury in the
positions (center and both window-side event of an accident may be in-
ones) of the rear seat. creased.
Legacy
instructions by the child restraint system ! Outback ! To hook the top tether
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional CAUTION
stability by offering another connection Always remove the head restraint
between a child restraint system and the when mounting a child restraint
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top system with a top tether. Failure to
tether whenever one is required or avail- do so may prevent the top tether
able. from being fastened tightly.
! Tether anchorage location
! Legacy ! Legacy
1. Fold down the rear seatback for the
window side seating position. Refer to
“Folding down the rear seatback” F1-8.
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
right, center and left positions, are already
installed on the rear edge of the roof.
Open the cover flap to use each ancho-
rage.
restraint while pressing the release button. 1. Remove the head restraint at the
Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid seating position where the child restraint
placing the head restraint in the passen- system has been installed with the seat-
ger compartment to prevent it from being belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
thrown around in the passenger compart- restraint while pressing the release button.
ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn. Store the head restraint in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
! Outback
3. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
– CONTINUED –
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Components
1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) 5) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
2) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) OFF indicator
3) SRS airbag system warning light 6) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
4) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
7) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor)
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1) Curtain airbag sensor (left-hand side) 7) Side airbag module (left-hand side) 13) Front passenger’s occupant detection
2) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) 8) Seatbelt buckle switch (right-hand side) system weight sensor
3) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) 9) Curtain airbag sensor (right-hand side)
4) Front passenger’s occupant detection 10) Side airbag module (right-hand side)
control module 11) Seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
5) Side airbag sensor (left-hand side) 12) Side airbag sensor (right-hand side)
6) Seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
NOTE . Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- immediately.
sioner are not controlled by the . Do not remove or disassemble the front
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- passenger’s seat.
tem. . Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
bag senger’s seat.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag . Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on . The front passenger’s seat must not be
the severity of impact. used with the head restraint removed.
The total load on the seat is monitored by . Do not leave any articles on the front
WARNING the passenger’s occupant detection sys- passenger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue
tem weight sensor under the seat. and buckle engaged when you leave your
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- Using the total seat load and seatbelt vehicle.
ror over the rear view mirror. If the buckle switch, the occupant detection . Do not place a magnet near the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects system determines whether the front seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
could become projectiles that could passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should or
should not be inflated. . Do not use front seats with their back-
seriously injure vehicle occupants. ward-forward position and seatback not
The occupant detection system may not being locked into place securely. If any of
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal them are not locked securely, adjust them
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
airbag deploys. This is normal. “Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in Observe the following precautions. Failure
different ways depending on the severity with manual seats only).
to do so may prevent the SUBARU
of impact. advanced frontal airbag system from If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
Have the system inspected by your functioning correctly or cause the system passenger’s occupant detection system
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS to fail. have failed, the SRS airbag system
airbag system warning light illuminates. . Do not apply any strong impact to the warning light will illuminate. Have the
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking. system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
er immediately if the SRS airbag system ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
warning light illuminates. OFF indicators airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
may affect the proper function of the If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
Have your vehicle inspected at your ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
SUBARU dealer. indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
NOTE is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, airbag ON indicator will remain off while
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- the OFF indicator will illuminate.
tensioner are not controlled by the With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tem. tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON period, the system is malfunctioning.
indicator Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF ately for an inspection.
indicator
! Conditions in which front passen-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
and OFF indicators show you the status of activated
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
The indicators are located next to the will not be activated when any of the
clock in the center portion of the dash- following conditions are met regarding the
board. front passenger’s seat:
When the ignition switch is turned to the . The seat is empty.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
facing child restraint system and an infant
which time the system is checked. Follow-
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
ing the system check, both indicators turn
follows.)
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the . The seat is equipped with a forward
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
facing child restraint system and a small passenger’s seat may be killed or ! If the front passenger’s frontal air-
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front bag ON indicator illuminates and the
that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- OFF indicator turns off even when
. The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest an infant or a small child is in a child
seat and a small child is in the booster place for children. restraint system (including booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.) seat)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu- Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following position if the front passenger’s frontal
mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
. The seat is occupied by a child who the load on the front passenger’s seat, OFF indicator turns off even when an
has outgrown a child restraint system activating the front passenger’s SRS infant or a small child is in a child restraint
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a frontal airbag even though that seat is system (including booster seat). Remove
small adult. occupied by a child. the child restraint system from the seat. By
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- . Do not place any article on the seat referring to the child restraint manufac-
tion system is faulty. other than the child occupant and a child turer’s recommendations as well as the
restraint system. child restraint system installation proce-
WARNING . Do not place more than one child on dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-25,
the seat. correctly install the child restraint system.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback. position and make sure that the front
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seatback pocket. turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
place his/her hands or legs on the front while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to following actions.
recommended that any forward fa-
pull the seatback. . Ensure that no article is placed on the
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that seat other than the child restraint system
even children who have outgrown a and the child occupant.
child restraint system be also . Ensure that there is no article left in the
seated in the REAR seat. This is seatback pocket.
because children sitting in the front . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/ lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
moving the seat back and forth. (Models small adult in the rear seat and im- using his/her feet.
equipped with manual seats only) mediately contact your SUBARU dealer . Do not place any article under the front
for an inspection. Even if the system passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is
while the OFF indicator turns off after from behind and under the seat. This may
recommended that on subsequent trips lift the seat cushion.
taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the
scribed above, relocate the child restraint . Do not squeeze any article between
rear seat. the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child pillar, door or center console box. This
inspection. restraint system should always wear the may lift the seat cushion.
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
NOTE is deactivated or activated. ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen- indicator illuminates and the ON
restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated indicator turns off even when the
seated in the front passenger’s seat, front passenger’s seat is occupied
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag by an adult
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
system may or may not activate the This can be caused by the adult incor-
impact when any of the following condi-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
tions is met regarding the front passen-
depending on the occupant’s seating Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
ger’s seat.
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS position. Ask the front passenger to set
frontal airbag is activated (the ON . When the seat is occupied by an adult. the seatback to the upright position, sit up
indicator remains illuminated while . When a heavy article is placed on the straight in the center of the seat cushion,
the OFF indicator turns off), take the seat. correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
following actions. her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
. Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
. Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat, indicator remains illuminated while the ON
the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS indicator remains off, take the following
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat actions.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi- . Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
nated while the OFF indicator turns off is occupied by an adult.
position.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
. Ensure that there is no article, book, bag system. If you have any questions, in such an area, please contact the
shoe, or other object trapped under the you may contact the following SUBARU SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side distributors: you bought your vehicle.
of the seat. ! Operation
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- of Columbia>
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by Subaru of America, Inc.
moving the seat back and forth. (Models Customer Dealer Services Department
equipped with manual seats only) P.O. Box 6000
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
indicator remains off. HI 96819
808-839-2273
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off, <Guam>
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
dealer for an inspection. 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
frame, instrument panel, combination me- 00910
ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, 787-793-2828
suspension or floor panel can affect the 1) Driver’s side
There are currently no SUBARU distribu- 2) Passenger’s side
operation of the SUBARU advanced air- tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
– CONTINUED –
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The SRS airbag can function only when After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- components can be very hot as a
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s result of deployment.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag vision is not obstructed. The time required
system is designed to determine the from detecting impact to the deflation of The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
activation or deactivation condition of the the SRS airbag after deployment is short- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag er than the blink of an eye. signed to deploy in the event of an
depending on the total load on the front accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
passenger’s seat monitored by the front frontal collision. It is basically not designed
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s occupant detection system to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
weight sensor. For this reason, only the cause the necessary protection can be
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
pretensioners operate at the same time.
the event of a collision, but this does not are basically not designed to deploy in
mean failure of the system. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
airbag would activate in a non-accident dents because deployment of only the
If the front sub sensors inside both front situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s
fenders and the impact sensors in the will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
airbag control module detect a predeter- and will not interfere with the driver’s would not help the occupant in those
mined amount of force during a frontal ability to maintain control of the vehicle. situations. The driver’s and front passen-
collision, the control module sends signals ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis.
module or both driver’s and front passen- fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen-
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
inflators of each airbag are triggered either another, and it may have no bearing on
sequentially or simultaneously, depending CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
on the severity of impact in the case of the itself.
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending Do not touch the SRS airbag system
on the severity of impact and the total load components around the steering
on the seat in the case of the front wheel and dashboard with bare
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
! Examples of accident in which the ! Examples of the types of accidents both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
driver’s/driver’s and front passen- in which it is possible that the frontal airbags may be activated when the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most driver’s/driver’s and front passen- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
likely deploy. ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- undercarriage area from the road surface
ploy. (such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
– CONTINUED –
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the WARNING
in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
front passenger’s SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- If the vehicle is damaged in an
airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
– CONTINUED –
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also WARNING
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the
aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side
placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects
– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
near the SRS side airbags. In the Before hanging clothing on the ! Operation
event of the SRS side airbag coat hooks, make sure there are
deployment, they could be pro- no sharp objects in the pockets.
pelled dangerously toward the Hang clothing directly on the
vehicle’s occupants and cause coat hooks without using hang-
injuries. ers.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a loca- The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
tion could be propelled through airbag can function only when the ignition
the cabin with great force by the switch is in the “ON” position.
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
airbag. In either case, the result side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
could be serious injuries. deploy independently of each other since
. Do not hang coat hangers or
WARNING each has its own impact sensor. There-
fore, they may not both deploy in the same
other hard or pointed objects on Do not put any kind of cover or accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
the coat hooks. If such items clothes or other objects over either SRS curtain airbag deploys independently
were hanging on the coat hooks front seatback and do not attach of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
during deployment of the SRS labels or stickers to the front seat frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
curtain airbags, they could cause surface on or near the SRS side instrument panel.
serious injuries by coming off the airbag. They could prevent proper
coat hooks and being thrown deployment of the SRS side airbag, An impact sensor, which senses impact
through the cabin or by prevent- reducing protection available to the force, is located in each of the left and
ing deployment of the curtain front seat’s occupant. right center pillars and rear wheel houses.
airbags. Another impact sensor, which also senses
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
impact force, is located in the airbag the seat on the side on which an impact is impact. Also, it is basically not designed to
control module. applied. deploy in frontal or rear impacts because
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
If one of the center pillar impact sensors When the SRS side airbag and SRS deployment would not help the occupant
and the impact sensor that is located in curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud in those situations.
the airbag control module together sense inflation noise will be heard and some
an impact force above a predetermined smoke will be released. These occur- Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
level in a side collision, the control module rences are a normal result of the deploy- airbag are designed to function on a one-
causes both the SRS side airbag and ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire time-only basis.
curtain airbag on the impacted side to in the vehicle. SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
inflate regardless of whether the rear deployment depend on the level of force
wheel house impact sensor on the same CAUTION experienced in the passenger compart-
side senses an impact. ment during a side impact collision. That
Do not touch the SRS side airbag level differs from one type of collision to
If one of the rear wheel house impact system components around the
sensors and the impact sensor that is another, and it may have no bearing on
front seat seatback with bare hands the visible damage done to the vehicle
located in the airbag control module right after deployment. Doing so can
together sense a sufficiently strong impact itself.
cause burns because the compo-
force, the control module causes only the nents can be very hot as a result of
SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side deployment.
to inflate. After deployment, do not touch any
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the
required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear
deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns
deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be
an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
for a while following deployment then airbag are designed to deploy in the event
slowly deflates. of an accident involving a moderate to
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain severe side impact collision. It is basically
airbag deploy even when no one occupies not designed to deploy in a lesser side
– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most 1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
likely deploy (Outback). airbag.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a
curbstone laterally.
– CONTINUED –
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (Outback). 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
ment. In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated
SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second.
deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- & SRS airbag system monitors
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
. Airbag control module (including im- . All related wiring & SRS airbag system servicing
pact sensors (all models) and rollover
sensors (Outback)) WARNING WARNING
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
If the warning light exhibits any of . When discarding an airbag mod-
. Frontal airbag module (front passen- the following conditions, there may
ger’s side) ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
be a malfunction in the seatbelt cle damaged by a collision, con-
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right- pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
hand side) sult your SUBARU dealer.
system. Immediately take your vehi-
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left- cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer . The SRS airbag has no user-
hand side) to have the system checked. Unless serviceable parts. Do not use
. Side airbag module (driver’s side) checked and properly repaired, the electrical test equipment on any
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS circuit related to the SRS airbag
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s
airbags will operate improperly (e.g. system. For required servicing of
side)
SRS airbags may inflate in a very the SRS airbag, consult your
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
house right-hand side) minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may in- ing with or disconnecting the
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel system’s wiring could result in
crease the risk of injury.
house left-hand side) accidental inflation of the SRS
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) . Flashing or flickering of the warn- airbag or could make the system
ing light inoperative, which may result in
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) . No illumination of the warning serious injury.
light when the ignition switch is
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
first turned to the “ON” position
ger’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the
ger’s side) warning light
. Front passenger’s occupant detection . Illumination of the warning light
system weight sensor while driving
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
– CONTINUED –
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION replaced, use only genuine SUBARU & Precautions against vehicle
parts. modification
If you need service or repair in areas
of your vehicle listed in the follow- NOTE
WARNING
ing, have an authorized SUBARU In the following cases, contact your
dealer perform the work. The SRS SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. To avoid accidental activation of the
airbag control module, impact sen- . The front part of the vehicle was system or rendering the system
sors and airbag modules are stored involved in an accident in which only inoperative, which may result in
in these areas. the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both serious injury, no modifications
. Under the center console driver’s and front passenger’s SRS should be made to any components
frontal airbags did not deploy. or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
. Inside each front fender . The pad of the steering wheel, the This includes the following modifi-
. Steering wheel and column and cover over the front passenger’s SRS cations:
nearby areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear . Installation of custom steering
. Top of the dashboard on front wheels
passenger’s side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
areas wise damaged. . Attachment of additional trim
. The center pillar, rear wheel house materials to the dashboard
. Each front seat and nearby area
or rear sub frame, or an area near these . Installation of custom seats
. Inside each center pillar parts, was involved in an accident in
. Replacement of seat fabric or
. In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS
leather
pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front . Installation of additional fabric or
. Between the rear seat cushion leather on the front seat
and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
side damaged. . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
. The rear part of the vehicle was crophone or any other accessory
. Under the rear center seat involved in an accident. to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
In the event that the SRS airbag is window, an assist grip, or any
deployed, replacement of the system other cabin surface that would be
should be performed only by an author- near a deploying SRS curtain
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- airbag.
nents of the SRS airbag system are
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-65
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
than genuine SUBARU acces-
sory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-16
Key number ........................................................ 2-2 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-16 2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3 Arming the system ............................................ 2-17
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-18
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18
Passive arming .................................................. 2-18
Door locks ........................................................... 2-5
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-19
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-19
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-6
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-20
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-7 Windows............................................................. 2-21
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7 Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-21
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-23
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-24
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-9 Trunk lid (Legacy).............................................. 2-24
Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)............................ 2-10 To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-24
Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)....................... 2-10 To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-24
Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10 Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-25
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10 Rear gate (Outback)........................................... 2-27
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-11 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-28
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-11 Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-29
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-12 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-30
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-16
System alarm operation...................................... 2-16
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys and door locks. You can keep the trunk number plate attached to the key set.
and glove box locked when you leave your Write down the key number and keep it in
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility. another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
CAUTION key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs For information on making replacement
against your knees while you are keys for models with the immobilizer
driving, it could turn the ignition system, refer to “Security ID plate” F2-3.
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
1) Master key
& Key number
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box 1) Key number plate
. Trunk lid 2) Security ID plate
The valet key fits only the ignition switch The key number is stamped on the key
Keys and doors 2-3
Immobilizer device may not cause harmful inter- . Do not get the key wet. If the key
ference, and (2) this device must gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
The immobilizer system is designed to accept any interference received, in- immediately.
prevent an unauthorized person from cluding interference that may cause
starting the engine. Only keys registered undesired operation.
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can Changes or modifications not ex- & Security ID plate
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if pressly approved by the party respon-
an unregistered key fits into the ignition sible for compliance could void the
switch and can be turned to the “START” user’s authority to operate the equip-
position, the engine will automatically stop ment.
after several seconds.
NOTE
Each immobilizer key contains a trans- To protect your vehicle from theft,
ponder in which the key’s ID code is please pay close attention to the fol-
stored. When a key is inserted into the lowing security precautions:
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
position, the transponder transmits the
with its keys inside.
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
windows and lock the doors (all mod-
matches the ID code registered in the
els) and rear gate (Outback). 1) Key number plate
immobilizer system, the system allows the
. Do not leave spare keys or any 2) Security ID plate
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
record of your key number in the
transmitted and acted upon almost in- The security ID is stamped on the security
vehicle.
stantly, the immobilizer system does not ID plate attached to the key set. Write
impede normal starting of the engine. down the security ID and keep it in
If the engine does not start, pull out the CAUTION another safe place, not in the vehicle.
key once before trying again. Refer to . Do not place the key under direct This number is needed to make a replace-
“Ignition switch” F3-3. sunlight or anywhere it may ment key if you lose your key or lock it
become hot. inside the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of This number is also needed for replace-
Industry Canada. Operation is subject ment or repair of the engine control unit,
to the following two conditions: (1) This integrated unit, combination meter (all
models) and security control unit
– CONTINUED –
2-4 Keys and doors
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
– CONTINUED –
2-6 Keys and doors
lights do not turn off automatically. To turn off Power door locking switches doors from the outside using the power
the lights, it is necessary that each door is door locking switches.
completely closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of & Key lock-in prevention func-
this function can be changed by a tion
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest This function prevents the doors from
SUBARU dealer if you would like to being locked with the key still in the
change the setting. ignition switch.
NOTE ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”. With the driver’s door open, the doors are
. When leaving the vehicle, please automatically kept unlocked even if the
make sure that all doors and the rear front side of the power door locking switch
gate (Outback) are completely closed. is pressed.
1) Lock
. The battery drainage prevention ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
2) Unlock
function does not operate while the tion function non-operational
key is in the ignition switch. All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can . If the lock lever is turned to the rear
be locked and unlocked by the power door (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
locking switches located at the driver’s open and the driver’s door is then closed
side and the front passenger’s side doors. with the lock lever in that position, the
To lock the doors, press the front side of driver’s door is locked.
the switch. . If the spare key is used to lock the
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of driver’s door from the outside of the
the switch. vehicle, the door is locked.
When you close the doors after you set This function’s operational/non-opera-
the door locks, the doors remain locked. tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
NOTE dealer for details.
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
– CONTINUED –
2-8 Keys and doors
NOTE Remote keyless entry system to the following two conditions: (1) This
. The factory setting (default setting) device may not cause harmful inter-
for this function is set as “operational”. ference, and (2) this device must
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure CAUTION accept any interference received, in-
you are holding the key before locking cluding interference that may cause
the doors. . Do not expose the remote trans- undesired operation.
mitter to severe shocks, such as Changes or modifications not ex-
those experienced as a result of pressly approved by the party respon-
dropping or throwing. sible for compliance could void the
. Do not take the remote transmit- user’s authority to operate the equip-
ter apart except when replacing ment.
the battery.
The transmitter for the remote keyless
. Do not get the remote transmitter entry system is located inside the key
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with head.
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans- The remote keyless entry system has the
mitter on an airplane, do not following functions.
press the button of the remote . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
transmitter while in the airplane. rear gate (Outback)) without a key
When any button of the remote . Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
transmitter is pressed, radio key
waves are sent and may affect . Sounding a panic alarm
the operation of the airplane. . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
When you carry the remote trans- tem. For detailed information, refer to
mitter in a bag on an airplane, “Alarm system” F2-16.
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter The operable distance of the remote
from being pressed. keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
This device complies with Part 15 of will vary depending on environmental
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of conditions. The system’s operable dis-
Industry Canada. Operation is subject tance will be shorter in areas near a
Keys and doors 2-9
facility or electronic equipment emitting & Locking the doors & Unlocking the doors
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
The remote keyless entry system does
not operate when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
rear gate (Outback). An electronic chirp door. An electronic chirp will sound twice
will sound once and the turn signal lights and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
will flash once. To unlock all doors and the rear gate
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk (Outback), briefly press the “ ” button a
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp second time within 5 seconds.
will sound five times and the turn signal
lights will flash five times to alert you that NOTE
: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button If the interval between the first and
: Unlock/disarm button
the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are
not properly closed. When you close the second presses of the “ ” button (for
: Lock/arm button unlocking of all of the doors and the
A: Panic button door, it will automatically lock and then an
electronic chirp will sound once and the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
turn signal lights will flash once. tem may not respond.
– CONTINUED –
2-10 Keys and doors
& Opening the trunk lid & Unlocking the rear gate NOTE
(Legacy) (Outback) If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear
is pressed continuously for at least 2 gate.
seconds. An electronic chirp will sound An electronic chirp will sound twice and
twice and the turn signal lights will flash the turn signal lights will flash twice.
twice.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
parked among many vehicles in a large button once.
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet The horn will sound and the turn signal
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ” lights will flash.
button three times in a 5-second period To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound button on the remote transmitter. If a
once and its turn signal lights to flash three button on the remote transmitter is not
times. pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
Keys and doors 2-11
& Selecting audible signal op- & Replacing the battery To replace the battery:
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will CAUTION
give you an audible signal when the doors
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
or in the transmitter when repla-
the audible signal off.
cing the battery.
To deactivate the audible signal, perform
the following procedure. You can also use . Be careful not to damage the
the same steps to restore the function. printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate. . Be careful not to allow children to
2. Press the “UNLOCK” side of the power touch the battery and any re-
door locking switch. moved parts; children could
swallow them.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch. 1. Remove the screw on the key head.
4. While holding down the “UNLOCK” . There is a danger of explosion if
side of the power door locking switch, pull an incorrect replacement battery
the key out and re-insert it into the ignition is used. Replace only with the
switch at least 5 times within 10 seconds same or equivalent type of bat-
after performing step 2. tery.
5. Open and close the driver’s door . Batteries should not be exposed
within 10 seconds after performing step 4. to excessive heat such as sun-
6. To indicate completion of the setting, shine, fire or the like.
the turn signal lights flash 3 times and the
chirp sounds 3 times. If the transmitter fails to operate when
used within the standard distance, this
You may have the above procedure may indicate a weak battery. Replace the
preformed by your SUBARU dealer. battery as soon as possible. The battery
can be replaced by your authorized
SUBARU dealer. If you replace the battery 2. Open the key head using a flat-head
by yourself, use utmost care that no dust, screwdriver.
oil or water enters the transmitter.
– CONTINUED –
2-12 Keys and doors
Alarm system The alarm is triggered by: 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
. Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk releasing the switch. The setting will then
The alarm system helps to protect your lid be changed as follows:
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as If the system was previously activated:
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if forced entry (only models with shock
someone attempts to break into your The trip meter screen displays “AL oF”
sensors (dealer option))
vehicle. and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
NOTE the system is now deactivated.
The system can be armed and disarmed If the system was previously deacti-
The alarm system can be set to trigger
with the remote transmitter. vated:
illumination of map lights and dome
The system does not operate when the light. The map lights and dome light The trip meter screen displays “AL on” and
key is inserted into the ignition switch. notification is deactivated as the fac- the horn sounds once, indicating that the
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set tory setting. Refer to “Function set- system is now activated.
for activation at the time of shipment from tings” F20. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your NOTE
the factory. You can set the system for
SUBARU dealer for details. You may have the above setting
deactivation yourself or have it done by
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
your SUBARU dealer.
& Activating and deactivating & If you have accidentally trig-
& System alarm operation the alarm system gered the alarm system
The alarm system will give the following To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarms when triggered: alarm system for activation or deactiva- ! To stop the alarm
. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the tion, do the following. Perform any of the following operations.
turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds. 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to . Press any button on the remote trans-
. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) “Disarming the system” F2-18. mitter.
remains open after the 30-second period, 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
the horn will continue to sound for a doors (and the rear gate (Outback)). position.
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the position.
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
Keys and doors 2-17
! To arm the system using power
& Arming the system door locking switch
! To arm the system using remote 1. Close all windows.
transmitter 2. Remove the key from the ignition
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if switch.
equipped). 3. Open the doors and get out of the
2. Remove the key from the ignition vehicle.
switch. 4. Make sure that the engine hood is
3. Open the doors and get out of the locked.
vehicle. 5. Close the doors (and the rear gate
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and (Outback)) but leave only the driver’s door
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked. or the front passenger’s door open.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
(Outback)).
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate (Outback)) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights
will flash once, and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
onds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors (rear gate or trunk lid) is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds 6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
five times, the turn signal lights flash five the power door locking switch to set the
: Press to Arm the system. times to alert you that the doors (or the door locks.
: Press to Disarm the system. rear gate) are not properly closed. When 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
you close the door, the system will sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
automatically arm and doors will automa- once and the security indicator light will
tically lock.
– CONTINUED –
2-18 Keys and doors
start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing – Doors are unlocked using the & Valet mode
for 30 seconds (standby time), the security remote transmitter. When you choose the valet mode, the
indicator light will then flash slowly (twice – Any door (including the rear gate alarm system does not operate. In valet
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- (Outback) or the trunk (Legacy)) is mode, the remote transmitter is used only
ing that the system has been armed for opened. for locking and unlocking the doors and
surveillance. – Ignition switch is turned to the rear gate (Outback) and panic activation.
“ON” position.
NOTE To enter the valet mode, change the
. The system can be armed even if the
& Disarming the system setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
engine hood, the windows and/or and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
moonroof are open. Always make sure 2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic 16. The security indicator light will con-
that they are fully closed before arming tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
the system. chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
lights will flash twice and the security indicating that the system is in the valet
. The 30-second standby time can be mode.
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- indicator light will turn off.
formed by your SUBARU dealer. To unlock all other doors and the rear gate To exit valet mode, change the setting of
. If your vehicle is a Legacy and you (Outback), briefly press the “ ” button a your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
open the trunk using the remote trans- second time within 5 seconds. mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
mitter’s “ ” button with the alarm ing the alarm system” F2-16.
system armed, the system will be ! Emergency disarming
temporarily placed in a standby state. If you cannot disarm the system using the & Passive arming
The system will go back to the surveil- transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, When passive arming mode has been
lance state upon locking the trunk. broken or the transmitter battery is too programmed by the dealer, arming of the
. The system is in the standby mode weak), you can disarm the system without system is automatically accomplished
for a 30-second period after locking the using the transmitter. without using the remote transmitter. Note
doors with the remote transmitter. The The system can be disarmed if you turn that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
security indicator light will flash at the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the MANUALLY LOCKED.
short intervals during this period. “ON” position with a registered key.
. If any of the following actions is ! To enter the passive mode
done during the standby period, the If you wish to program the passive arming
system will not switch to the surveil- mode, have it done by your SUBARU
lance state. dealer.
Keys and doors 2-19
! Arming the system “LOCK” position and remove the key from ! Disarming the system
the ignition switch. To disarm the system, briefly press the
CAUTION 3. Open the doors and get out of the “ ” button on the transmitter.
In passive mode, the system will vehicle.
& Tripped sensor identification
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatically lock the The security indicator light flashes when
doors. In order to lock the doors the alarm system has been triggered.
you must either lock them as in- Also, the number of flashes indicates the
dicated in step 4 below or with the location of unauthorized intrusion or the
key once they have been closed. severity of impact on the vehicle.
Failure to lock the doors manually When the ignition switch is turned to the
will result in a higher security risk. “ON” position, the indicator light will
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” follows:
position. . When a door or rear gate (Outback)
was opened: 5 times
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened:
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors 4 times
with the inside door lock levers. . When a strong impact or multiple
5. Close the doors. The system will impacts were sensed: twice (only models
automatically arm after 1 minute. with shock sensors (dealer option))
In the passive mode, the system can also . When a light impact was sensed: once
be armed with the remote transmitter or (only models with shock sensors (dealer
with the power door locking switches. If option))
the remote transmitter or power door
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, & Shock sensors (dealer op-
arming will take place immediately regard- tion)
1) LOCK
less of whether or not the passive mode The shock sensors trigger the alarm
2) ON has been selected. system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to electric wires is cut. The alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-20 Keys and doors
causes the horn to sound and the turn Child safety locks the outside.
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
a strong impact or multiple impacts by WARNING
sounding the horn and flashing the turn
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30 Always turn the child safety locks to
seconds. the “LOCK” position when children
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
connect them and set them for activation could result if a child accidentally
or deactivation. opens the door and falls out.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration like those shown in the follow-
ing and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle. Each rear door has a child safety lock that
Examples: prevents the doors from being opened
– Vibration from construction site even if the inside door handle is pulled.
– Vibration in multistory car park When the child safety lock lever is in the
– Vibration from trains “LOCK” position, the door cannot be
. You can have the sensitivity of the opened from inside regardless of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre- position of the inner door handle lock
ference by your SUBARU dealer. lever. The door can only be opened from
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
2-22 Keys and doors
! Locking the passengers’ windows & Power window operation by ! Operating the windows
passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
1) Lock To open:
2) Unlock Press the switch down and hold it until the
To lock: window reaches the desired position.
Press the lock switch. When the lock To close:
switch is in the pressed “LOCK” position, Each passenger window can be controlled Pull the switch up and hold it until the
the passengers’ windows cannot be by the power window switch located on window reaches the desired position.
opened or closed. the door.
When the lock switch on the power
To unlock: window switch cluster, located on the
Press the lock switch again. driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers’
switches.
– CONTINUED –
2-24 Keys and doors
& Initialization of power win- Trunk lid (Legacy) To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
dow trunk lid down until the latch engages.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due NOTE
to situations such as battery or fuse
WARNING
. Do not leave your valuables in the
replacement, the following functions are . To prevent dangerous exhaust trunk when you leave your vehicle.
deactivated. gas from entering the vehicle, . Even when the trunk lid cannot be
. One-touch auto up/down function always keep the trunk lid closed opened using the remote keyless entry
. Anti-entrapment function while driving. system, you can open the trunk lid by
. Help prevent children, adults or using the key. Refer to “Trunk lid
Initialize the power window in the following (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
procedure to reactivate such functions. animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny opened” F9-19.
1. Close the driver’s door. days, the temperature in the
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” trunk could quickly become high
position.
& To open the trunk lid from
enough to cause death or serious inside
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway heat-related injuries including
by pushing down the power window brain damage to anyone locked
switch. inside, particularly for small chil-
4. Pull up the power window switch and dren.
close the window completely. Continue . When leaving the vehicle, close
pulling up the switch for approximately 1 all windows and lock all doors.
second after the window is closed com- Also make certain that the trunk
pletely. is closed.
! To lock and unlock the trunk lid & Internal trunk lid release WARNING
opener switch handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a Never allow any child to get in the
device designed to open the trunk lid from trunk and play with the release
inside the trunk. In the event children or handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
adults become locked inside the trunk, the cle without knowing that a child is
handle allows them to open the lid. The inside the trunk and the child opens
handle is located on the inside of the trunk the lid using the release handle, the
lid. child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
When you entrust your vehicle key to handle may be damaged.
another person, you can lock the trunk lid
opener switch to prevent items in the trunk . Do not use the handle as a hook
from being stolen. to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
To lock the trunk lid opener switch, per-
Such use may result in damage
form the following procedure.
of the handle.
1. Open the glove box. Refer to “Glove
box” F6-6. To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, . Load the trunk so that cargo can
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the not strike the release handle. If
2. Press the trunk lid opener lock button.
arrow on the handle. This operation the cargo hits the handle while
To unlock the trunk lid opener switch, unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the the vehicle is being driven, the
perform the same procedure again. lid. handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
The handle is made of material that
cause cargo to fall out of the
remains luminescent for approximately
trunk, which could create a traffic
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
safety hazard.
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
– CONTINUED –
2-26 Keys and doors
– CONTINUED –
2-28 Keys and doors
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
Ignition switch tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi- . If the ignition switch will not move
tion, thereby stopping the engine. from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
Also, if the key is attached to a position, turn the steering wheel
WARNING keyholder or to a large bunch of slightly to the left and right as you turn
other keys, centrifugal force may act the ignition switch.
. Never turn the ignition switch to on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
“LOCK” while the vehicle is in unwanted turning of the ignition & LOCK
being driven or towed because switch.
that will lock the steering wheel, The key can only be inserted or removed
preventing steering control. And in this position. The ignition switch will lock
The ignition switch has four positions:
when the engine is turned off, it the steering wheel when you remove the
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
takes a much greater effort than key.
usual to steer. If turning the key is difficult, turn the
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ways remove the key from the as you turn the key.
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the sunroof
or other controls or even make
the vehicle move.
NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or not running. The key can be turned from “Acc” to
key case to either key. If it banged . Using electrical accessories for a “LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the while turning it (all models) and the select
you are driving, it could turn the “ON” or “Acc” position can cause the lever is in the “P” position (AT and CVT
ignition switch from the “ON” posi- battery to go dead. models).
– CONTINUED –
3-4 Instruments and controls
– CONTINUED –
3-6 Instruments and controls
“ ” on the trip meter display. needles when the ignition switch is in seconds of illumination of the odometer/
The display can be switched as shown in the “ON” position. Change the setting trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
the following illustration by pressing the when the ignition switch is in the off.
trip knob. “LOCK” or “Acc” position. Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
& Speedometer the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
The speedometer shows the vehicle meter will turn off.
speed.
& Double trip meter
& Odometer
: Activated
This meter displays the two trip meters
: Deactivated This meter displays the odometer when when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
NOTE the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. position.
. Your vehicle’s initial movement The odometer shows the total distance The trip meter shows the distance that the
setting of the meter/gauge needles that the vehicle has been driven. vehicle has been driven since you last set
has been set for activation “ ” at it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
the time of shipment from the factory. switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position, If you press the trip knob when the ignition
. It is not possible to change the initial the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
movement setting of the meter/gauge do not press the trip knob within 10 the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
Instruments and controls 3-7
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
*1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be displayed when the ignition switch is be cut by the engine control module
1) Low fuel warning light
in the “ON” position. to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run- The fuel gauge shows the approximate
*2: MT models only
ning normally after the engine speed amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A is reduced below the red zone. When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E”
and keep the knob pressed for more than even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
2 seconds.
– CONTINUED –
3-8 Instruments and controls
The gauge may move slightly during gauge. & ECO gauge
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel This indicates that the fuel filler door
level movement in the tank. (lid) is located on the right side of the
If you press the trip knob while the ignition vehicle.
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the fuel gauge’s dial will light up and the ! Low fuel warning light
needle will indicate the amount of fuel The low fuel warning light illuminates
remaining in the tank. when the fuel tank is nearly empty. It only
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating operates when the ignition switch is in the
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank, “ON” position. When this light illuminates,
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 fill the fuel tank immediately.
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the CAUTION
“E” position and the dial and needle will
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
turn off. 1) U.S.-spec. models
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
NOTE
result of an empty tank could cause The ECO gauge shows the difference
damage to the engine. between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption and the current rate of fuel
consumption. Using the average rate of
NOTE fuel consumption since the trip meter was
. The low fuel warning light illumi- last reset, the indicator needle behaves as
nates when the remaining amount of described in the following items.
fuel in the tank has reached approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp. U.S.-spec. models:
gal). If the current rate of fuel consumption is
. The low fuel warning light does not lower than the average rate of fuel
turn off unless the tank is replenished consumption, the indicator needle points
up to a fuel quantity of approximately to the “+” side. If the current rate of fuel
4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal). consumption is higher than the average
rate of fuel consumption, the indicator
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel needle points to the “−” side. When the
Instruments and controls 3-9
indicator needle is pointing to the “+” side, Warning and indicator lights : AT OIL TEMP warning light
it indicates fuel-efficient driving. (AT and CVT models)
Except U.S.-spec. models: Several of the warning and indicator lights / : ABS warning light
If the current rate of fuel consumption is illuminate momentarily and then go out
lower than the average rate of fuel when the ignition switch is initially turned : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
consumption, the indicator needle points to the “ON” position. This permits check- light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
to the “−” side. If the current rate of fuel ing the operation of the bulbs. tion indicator light
consumption is higher than the average Apply the parking brake and turn the : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
rate of fuel consumption, the indicator ignition switch to the “ON” position. The tor light
needle points to the “+” side. When the following lights illuminate:
indicator needle is pointing to the “−” side, / : Brake system warning light
: Seatbelt warning light
it indicates fuel-efficient driving. (The seatbelt warning light turns off : Hill Holder indicator light
NOTE only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.) : All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT and
. The ECO gauge shows only an CVT models)
approximate indication. : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
. After resetting the trip meter, the light : Low tire pressure warning light
average rate of fuel consumption is not (The seatbelt warning light turns off (U.S.-spec. models)
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). only when the front seat passenger ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not fastens the seatbelt.) ON indicator light
operate.
: SRS airbag system warning light / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- OFF indicator light
function indicator lamp : Low fuel warning light
: Coolant temperature high warning light : Door open warning light
: Charge warning light : Door open indicator light
: Oil pressure warning light : Cruise control indicator light
: Engine low oil level warning light : Cruise control set indicator light
: Windshield washer fluid warning light : Select lever/gear position indicator
– CONTINUED –
3-10 Instruments and controls
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a The warning light(s) for unfastened
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the seatbelt(s) will alternate between
corresponding system. steady illumination and flashing at
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer 15-second intervals. The chime will
for repair. not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
& Seatbelt warning light mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
and chime The warning light(s) for unfastened
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt seatbelt(s) will alternate between
warning device at the driver’s and front flashing and steady illumination at
passenger’s seat, as required by current 15-second intervals and the chime
safety standards. will sound while the warning light(s)
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” is/are flashing.
Front passenger’s warning light . It is possible to cancel the warning
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat- operation that follows the 6-second
! Operation
belts by the warning lights in the locations warning after turning ON the ignition
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ switch. When the ignition switch is
indicated in the following illustration and a has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
chime. turned ON next time, however, the
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” complete sequence of the warning
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will operation resumes. For further details
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the about canceling the warning operation,
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- please contact your SUBARU dealer.
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat. Observe the
to the vehicle speed. following precautions. Failure to do so
– At speeds lower than approxi- may prevent the device from functioning
Driver’s warning light mately 9 mph (15 km/h) correctly or cause the device to fail.
Instruments and controls 3-11
. Do not install any accessory such as a equipped with manual seats only) minor collision or not inflate in a
table or TV onto the seatback. severe collision), which may in-
. Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front crease the risk of injury.
seatback pocket. passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to tions described above, immediately con- ing light
place his/her hands or legs on the front tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- . No illumination of the warning
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tion. light when the ignition switch is
pull the seatback. first turned to the “ON” position
. Do not use front seats with their back- & SRS airbag system . Continuous illumination of the
ward-forward position and seatback not warning light warning light
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them When the ignition switch is turned to the . Illumination of the warning light
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to “ON” position, the SRS airbag system while driving
“Manual seat” F1-3 (models equipped warning light will illuminate for approxi-
with manual seats only). mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side
If the seatbelt warning device for the front airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-
passenger’s seat does not function cor- belt pretensioners are in normal operation.
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is WARNING
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), If the warning light exhibits any of
take the following actions. the following conditions, there may
. Ensure that no article is placed on the be a malfunction in the seatbelt
seat other than a child restraint system pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
and its child occupant. system. Immediately take your vehi-
. Ensure that there is no article left in the cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
seatback pocket. to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
seat are locked into place securely by
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
– CONTINUED –
3-12 Instruments and controls
& Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminates depending on the tion without having the emission
airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal control system checked and re-
tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- paired as necessary could cause
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. serious damage, which may not be
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
indicator will remain off. while the engine is running, it may indicate
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag that there is a problem or potential
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal problem somewhere in the emission con-
airbag ON indicator will remain off while trol system.
the OFF indicator will illuminate. ! If the light illuminates steadily
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” If the light illuminates steadily while driving
position, if both the ON and OFF indica- or does not turn off after the engine starts,
tors remain illuminated or off simulta- an emission control system malfunction
neously even after the system check has been detected.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON period, the system is malfunctioning.
indicator Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- You should have your vehicle checked by
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF ately for an inspection. an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
indicator ately.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON & CHECK ENGINE warn- NOTE
and OFF indicators show you the status of ing light/Malfunction This light also illuminates when the fuel
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. indicator lamp filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
The indicators are located next to the If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
clock in the center portion of the dash- CAUTION
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
board. light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
When the ignition switch is turned to the malfunction indicator lamp illumi- could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF nates while you are driving, have Remove the cap and retighten it until it
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
ing the system check, both indicators turn possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
Instruments and controls 3-13
warning light/malfunction indicator lamp & Coolant temperature Safely stop the vehicle as
turn off immediately. It may take several low indicator light/Cool- soon as possible, and refer
driving trips. If the light does not turn off, ant temperature high to the emergency steps for the
take your vehicle to your authorized case of engine overheating.
SUBARU dealer immediately.
warning light
After that, have the system
! If the light is blinking CAUTION checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-
If the light is blinking while driving, an
. After turning the ignition switch gine overheating” F9-12.
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission to the “ON” position, if this – Blinking in RED and BLUE
control system. indicator light/warning light be- alternately:
haves under any of the following The electrical system may be
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
conditions, the electrical system malfunctioning. Contact your
sion control system, you should conform
may be malfunctioning. Contact SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
to the following instructions.
your SUBARU dealer immedi- tion.
. Reduce vehicle speed. ately for an inspection.
. Avoid hard acceleration. This coolant temperature low indicator
– It remains blinking in RED.
. Avoid steep uphill grades. light/coolant temperature high warning
– It remains illuminated in RED
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- light has the following three functions.
for more than 2 seconds.
ble. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as – It remains blinking in RED and cient warming up of the engine
possible. BLUE alternately.
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
. While driving, if this indicator engine is close to overheating
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- light/warning light behaves under
function indicator lamp may stop blinking . Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
any of the following conditions, ing condition of the engine
and illuminate steadily after several driv- take the specified appropriate
ing trips. You should have your vehicle measure listed below. For the system check, this indicator light/
checked by an authorized SUBARU deal- warning light illuminates in RED for
– Blinking in RED:
er immediately. approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
Decelerate the vehicle. After
the blinking RED light turns tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
off, you can drive the vehicle After that, this indicator light/warning light
normally. changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
– Illuminated in RED:
– CONTINUED –
3-14 Instruments and controls
turns off when the engine is warmed up & Charge warning light at the proper level but the light remains
sufficiently. illuminated, contact your nearest
If this light illuminates when the engine is SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the engine coolant temperature in- running, it may indicate that the charging
creases over the appropriate range, the system is not working properly. & Engine low oil level
indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
At this time, decelerate the vehicle. After If the light illuminates while driving or does warning light
the blinking RED light turns off, you can not turn off after the engine starts, stop the The engine low oil level warning light
drive the vehicle normally. However, if the engine at the first safe opportunity and illuminates when the ignition switch is
indicator light/warning light often blinks in check the alternator belt. If the belt is turned to the “ON” position and turns off
RED, the electrical system may be mal- loose, broken or if the belt is in good after approximately 2 seconds.
functioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer condition but the light remains illuminated,
This light also illuminates when the engine
for an inspection. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
oil level decreases to the lower limit. The
immediately.
If the engine coolant temperature in- illuminating conditions and remaining oil
creases further, the indicator light/warning level are shown in the following items.
& Oil pressure warning 2.5 L models:
light illuminates in RED continuously. At light
this time, the engine may be overheating. . when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
Safely stop the vehicle as soon as CAUTION position but the engine is not running:
possible, and refer to the emergency approximately 1.9 US qt (1.8 liters, 1.6
steps for the case of engine overheating. Do not operate the engine with the Imp qt)
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-12. oil pressure warning light on. This . while the engine is running: approxi-
After that, have the system checked by may cause serious engine damage. mately 3.2 US qt (3.0 liters, 2.6 Imp qt)
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
If this light illuminates when the engine is 3.6 L models:
NOTE running, it may indicate that the engine oil . when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
If the engine is restarted after a certain pressure is low and the lubricating system position but the engine is not running:
driving condition, this indicator light/ is not working properly. approximately 4.0 US qt (3.8 liters, 3.3
warning light may illuminate in RED. If the light illuminates while driving or does Imp qt)
However, this is not a malfunction if the not turn off after the engine starts, stop the . while the engine is running: approxi-
indicator light/warning light turns off engine at the first safe opportunity and mately 5.6 US qt (5.3 liters, 4.7 Imp qt)
after a short time. check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
If the engine low oil level warning light
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
Instruments and controls 3-15
at a safe and level location, and then If this light illuminates when the engine is pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
check the engine oil level. When the running, it may indicate that the transmis- a different size than the size indicated on
engine oil level is not within the normal sion fluid temperature is too hot. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
range, refill with engine oil if necessary. If the light illuminates while driving, im- sure label, you should determine the
Refer to “Engine oil” F11-12. mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place proper tire inflation pressure for those
If the warning light does not turn off after and let the engine idle until the warning tires.)
refilling with engine oil or the warning light light turns off. As an added safety feature, your vehicle
illuminates even though the engine oil has been equipped with a tire pressure
! Transmission control system warn-
level is within the normal range, have the monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
ing
system checked by a SUBARU dealer. a low tire pressure telltale when one or
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
NOTE after the engine has started, it may more of your tires is significantly under-
indicate that the transmission control inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
. The engine low oil level warning
system is not working properly. Contact pressure telltale illuminates, you should
light will not turn off immediately even
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service stop and check your tires as soon as
if you replace or add engine oil. It will
immediately. possible, and inflate them to the proper
turn off only when the vehicle is idling
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
and the engine is warmed up comple-
& Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
tely.
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
. When the vehicle is considerably warning light (U.S.-spec. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
inclined on an uphill or steep slope, the models) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
warning light may illuminate tempora-
When the ignition switch is turned to the stopping ability.
rily due to the movement of engine oil
in the engine. “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- Please note that the TPMS is not a
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 substitute for proper tire maintenance,
seconds to check that the tire pressure and it is the driver’s responsibility to
& AT OIL TEMP warning monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning maintain correct tire pressure, even if
light (AT and CVT mod- properly. If there is no problem and all tires under-inflation has not reached the level
els) are properly inflated, the light will go out. to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressure telltale.
The AT oil temperature warning light “AT
OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with
switch is turned to the “ON” position and and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
turns off after approximately 2 seconds. recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating properly.
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
– CONTINUED –
3-16 Instruments and controls
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
When the system detects a malfunction, tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as to have the system inspected.
the telltale will flash for approximately one soon as possible.
minute and then remain continuously If this light illuminates while driving,
illuminated. This sequence will continue never brake suddenly and keep CAUTION
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long driving straight ahead while gradu-
as the malfunction exists. When the The tire pressure monitoring system
ally reducing speed. Then slowly is NOT a substitute for manually
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the pull off the road to a safe place.
system may not be able to detect or signal checking tire pressure. The tire
Otherwise an accident involving pressure should be checked peri-
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS serious vehicle damage and serious
malfunctions may occur for a variety of odically (at least monthly) using a
personal injury could occur. tire gauge. After any change to tire
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on If this light still illuminates while pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from driving after adjusting the tire pres- itoring system will not re-check tire
functioning properly. Always check the sure, a tire may have significant inflation pressures until the vehicle
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing damage and a fast leak that causes is first driven more than 20 mph (32
one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
to continue to function properly. When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
Should the warning light illuminate stea- wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures
dily after blinking for approximately one original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low
minute, have the system inspected by being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn
possible. steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for
WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires.
four road wheels. Contact your
If this light does not illuminate SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting. If the light The ABS warning light illuminates when
steadily after blinking for approxi- illuminates steadily after blinking the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
mately one minute, you should have for approximately one minute,
Instruments and controls 3-17
position and turns off after approximately 2 gether with the brake system warning light & Brake system
seconds. if the EBD system malfunctions. For warning light
This is an indication that the ABS system further details of the EBD system mal-
is working properly. function warning, refer to “Brake system WARNING
warning light” F3-17.
CAUTION . Driving with the brake system
NOTE warning light on is dangerous.
If the warning light behaves as If the warning light behavior is as This indicates your brake system
follows, the ABS system may not described in the following conditions, may not be working properly. If
work properly. the ABS system may be considered the light remains illuminated,
When the warning light illuminates, normal. have the brakes inspected by a
the ABS function shuts down; how- . The warning light illuminates right SUBARU dealer immediately.
ever, the conventional brake system after the engine is started but turns off . If at all in doubt about whether
continues to operate normally. immediately, remaining off. the brakes are operating prop-
. The warning light does not illu- . The warning light remains illumi- erly, do not drive the vehicle.
minate when the ignition switch nated after the engine has been started, Have your vehicle towed to the
is turned to the “ON” position. but it turns off when the vehicle speed nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
reaches approximately 8 mph (12 pair.
. The warning light illuminates km/h).
when the ignition switch is . If the brake system warning light
. The warning light illuminates during
turned to the “ON” position, but flashes, the electronic parking
driving, but it turns off immediately and
it does not turn off even when the brake system may be malfunc-
remains off.
vehicle speed exceeds approxi- tioning. Immediately stop your
mately 8 mph (12 km/h). When driving with an insufficient battery vehicle in a safe location, use
voltage such as when the engine is jump tire stops under the tires to
. The warning light illuminates dur-
started, the ABS warning light may illumi- prevent the vehicle from moving
ing driving.
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage and contact your SUBARU deal-
If any of these conditions occur, and does not indicate a malfunction. er. For details, refer to “Electro-
have the ABS system repaired at When the battery becomes fully charged, nic parking brake” F7-34.
the first available opportunity by the light will turn off.
your SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
3-18 Instruments and controls
has been restarted, shut down the engine be applied. The light illuminates when the ignition
again, apply the parking brake, and check switch is turned to the “ON” position and
the brake fluid level. ! Frequent operation warning turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the The brake system warning light flashes for
20 seconds and a chirp sound will be The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be switch is pressed to activate the Hill
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the Holder function.
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected. operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking & Low fuel warning
6. If the brake fluid level is below the light
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. brake system.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the NOTE The low fuel warning light illuminates
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. when the tank is nearly empty approxi-
Wait until the warning light turns off. mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
! Electronic parking brake system ! Emergency released warning gal). It only operates when the ignition
warning switch is in the “ON” position.
The brake system warning light flashes
The brake system warning light flashes when the parking brake is automatically NOTE
when the electronic parking brake system released in case of an emergency.
is malfunctioning. If the warning light This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
flashes, promptly park in a safe location & Hill Holder indicator fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
as soon as possible and contact your light
SUBARU dealer. gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
The brake system warning light remains WARNING
illuminated when the parking brake cannot CAUTION
be released even if the parking brake If the Hill Holder indicator light does
not illuminate even when the Hill Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
switch is pulled. For details, refer to
Holder switch is pressed to activate ever the low fuel warning light
“Electronic parking brake” F7-34.
the Hill Holder function, the electro- illuminates. Engine misfires as a
! Parking brake apply inhibit warning nic parking brake system may be result of an empty tank could cause
The brake system warning light flashes for malfunctioning. Immediately stop damage to the engine.
10 seconds and a chirp sound will be the vehicle in a safe location and
heard if the parking brake switch is contact your SUBARU dealer.
operated when the parking brake cannot
– CONTINUED –
3-20 Instruments and controls
& Door open warning & Windshield washer sively low in any of its tires.
light fluid warning light ! For CVT models
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” This light illuminates when the fluid level in This light illuminates when All-Wheel
position, the door open warning light the windshield washer fluid tank de- Drive is disengaged and the drive me-
illuminates for approximately 2 seconds creases to the lower limit (approximately chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive
and then turns off. 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt). for maintenance or similar purposes.
The door open warning light illuminates if This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
any door, the rear gate (Outback) or trunk & All-Wheel Drive with tires of different diameters fitted on its
lid (Legacy) is not fully closed. This warning light (AT and wheels or with the air pressure exces-
function is effective even if the ignition CVT models) sively low in any of its tires.
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position or
the key is removed from the ignition WARNING & Vehicle Dynamics
switch. Control warning light/
Continued driving with the AWD Vehicle Dynamics Con-
Always make sure this light is not illumi- warning light flashing can lead to
nated before you start to drive. trol operation indicator
powertrain damage. If the AWD light
warning light flashes, promptly park
& Door open indicator in a safe place then check whether The light illuminates when the ignition
light all four tires are the same diameter switch is turned to the “ON” position and
When any of the doors, the rear gate and whether any of the tires has a turns off several seconds after the engine
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not puncture or has lost air pressure for has started. This lighting pattern indicates
fully closed, the door open indicator light some other reason. that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
illuminates. This function is effective even is operating normally.
if the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi-
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
“Acc” position or the key is removed from nates when the ignition switch is turned to
light
the ignition switch. the “ON” position and turns off after the
engine has started.
The open door is indicated by the corre- CAUTION
sponding part of the door open warning ! For AT models
light. This light flashes if the vehicle is driven The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
with tires of different diameters fitted on its tem provides its ABS control
Always make sure this light is not illumi- through the electrical circuit of the
nated before you start to drive. wheels or with the air pressure exces-
Instruments and controls 3-21
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- NOTE
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics ately. . The light may remain illuminated for
Control system becomes unable to . The warning light does not illuminate a short period of time after the engine
provide ABS control. As a result, the when the ignition switch is turned to the has been started, especially in cold
Vehicle Dynamics Control system “ON” position. weather. This does not indicate the
also becomes inoperative, causing . The warning light illuminates while the existence of a problem. The light
the warning light to illuminate. vehicle is running. should turn off as soon as the engine
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics has warmed up.
Control and ABS systems are inop- NOTE . The indicator light illuminates when
erative in this case, the ordinary If the warning light behavior is as the engine has developed a problem
functions of the brake system are described in the following examples, and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
still available. You will be safe while the Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunction indicator lamp is on.
driving with this condition, but drive may be considered normal. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
carefully and have your vehicle . The warning light illuminates right probably malfunctioning under the follow-
checked at a SUBARU dealer as after the engine is started but turns off ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
soon as possible. immediately, remaining off. at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The warning light illuminates after . The light does not turn off even after
NOTE the engine has started and turns off the lapse of several minutes (the engine
while the vehicle is subsequently being has warmed up) after the engine has
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle driven.
Dynamics Control system itself mal- started.
. The warning light illuminates during
functions, the warning light only illumi- driving, but it turns off immediately and
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock & Vehicle Dynamics
remains off. Control OFF indicator
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- light
. The warning light illuminates when tion indicator light The light illuminates when the ignition
the electronic control system of the The indicator light flashes during activa- switch is turned to the “ON” position and
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system tion of the skid suppression function and turns off after approximately 2 seconds.
malfunctions. during activation of the traction control The light illuminates when the Vehicle
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is function. Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
probably inoperative under any of the to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
following conditions. Have your vehicle trol system.
– CONTINUED –
3-22 Instruments and controls
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is faulty. Contact your nearest SUBARU “Automatic transmission/Continuously
probably malfunctioning under any of the dealer immediately. variable transmission” F7-18.
following conditions. Have your vehicle ! MT models
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- In the event that an unauthorized key (for
ately. example, an unauthorized duplicate) is The shift-up indicator light illuminates and
used, the security indicator light illumi- informs the driver about the upshift timing
. The light does not illuminate when the nates. for fuel-efficient driving.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. The gear position indicator light and the
& Select lever/gear position in- shift-up indicator can be activated or
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
dicator deactivated by performing the following
procedure.
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
& Security indicator light 2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or
“ ” on the trip meter display.
This indicator light shows the status of the The display can be switched as shown in
alarm system. It also indicates operation the following illustration by pressing the
of the immobilizer system. trip knob.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2-
16.
This indicator shows the position of the
! Immobilizer system shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT
This light blinks approximately 60 seconds and CVT models).
after the ignition switch is turned from
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” ! AT and CVT models
position or immediately after the key is When the manual mode is selected, the *1: “ ” or “ ” and “ ” or “ ” cannot
pulled out. Refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3. gear position indicator (which shows the be displayed when the ignition switch is
current gear selection) and the upshift/ in the “ON” position.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may downshift indicator light up. Refer to
indicate that immobilizer system may be *2: MT models only
Instruments and controls 3-23
3. To change the current setting, press & High beam indicator & Cruise control set in-
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds. light dicator light
: Activated This light shows that the headlights are in The cruise control set indicator light
the high beam mode. illuminates when the ignition switch is
: Deactivated
This indicator light also illuminates when turned to the “ON” position and turns off
NOTE the headlight flasher is operated. after approximately 3 seconds.
. The initial setting for your vehicle of This light illuminates when vehicle speed
the gear position indicator and shift-up & Cruise control indica- has been set.
indicator has been set for activation tor light
“ ” at the time of shipment from the & Headlight indicator
The cruise control indicator light illumi-
factory. nates when the ignition switch is turned to
light
. It is not possible to change the the “ON” position and turns off after This indicator light illuminates under the
setting of the gear position indicator/ approximately 3 seconds. following conditions.
shift-up indicator when the ignition
This light illuminates when the “CRUISE” . when the light switch is turned to the
switch is in the “ON” position. Change
main switch is pressed. “ ” or “ ” position
the setting when the ignition switch is
in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position. . when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
NOTE position and the headlights illuminate
& Turn signal indicator . If you move the cruise control lever automatically
or press the main switch button while
lights turning the ignition switch “ON”, the & Front fog light indicator
These lights show the operation of the turn cruise control function is deactivated light (if equipped)
signal or lane change signal. and the “CRUISE” indicator light
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink flashes. To reactivate the cruise control This indicator light illuminates while the
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned function, turn the ignition switch back front fog lights are illuminated.
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-50. then turn it again to the “ON” position.
. If this indicator light and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
3-24 Instruments and controls
& Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi- “ON” position, the indication does not
tor cation flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
– CONTINUED –
3-26 Instruments and controls
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica- & Current fuel consumption & Driving range on remaining
tion between the average fuel consump- fuel
tion corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the B trip meter
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
1) U.S.-spec. models
actual values and should thus be 2) Except U.S.-spec. models 1) U.S.-spec. models
treated only as a guide.
This indication shows the rate of fuel 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
. When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption consumption at the present moment. The driving range indicates the distance
corresponding to that trip meter indica- that can be driven taking into account the
tion is not shown until the vehicle has amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
subsequently covered a distance of 1 the average rate of fuel consumption.
mile (or 1 km). When the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates, the driving range indication flashes
for 5 seconds. (The display first switches
to the driving range indication if it was
originally giving some other indication.)
Instruments and controls 3-27
& Daytime running light system parking brake is applied, the daytime Turn signal lever
running lights continue to illuminate
WARNING until the ignition switch is returned to
the “LOCK” position.
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
The illumination brightness of the clock The front fog lights operate under the
display, audio, air conditioner, multi func- following conditions.
tion display and meter/gauge dims under . when the light switch is in the “ ”
the following conditions. position
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or . when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
“ ” position position and the headlights turn on auto-
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO” matically
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically However, the front fog lights turn off when
the headlights are switched to high beam.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility. To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. fog light switch on the turn signal lever
upward to the “ ” position. To turn off the
To darken, turn the control dial downward. front fog lights, turn the switch back down
to the “OFF” position.
Instruments and controls 3-31
fluid” F11-42. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate- & Windshield wiper and washer
Also, when driving the vehicle rial on the windshield or the wiper switches
when there are freezing tempera- blades results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you The wiper operates only when the ignition
tures, use non-freezing type wi- switch is in the “ON” position.
per blades. cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper ! Windshield wipers
. Do not clean the wiper blades operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
with gasoline or a solvent, such face of the windshield or rear window
as paint thinner or benzine. This and the wiper blades using a sponge or
will cause deterioration of the soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
wiper blades. mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
NOTE blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
If the motor operates continuously even after following this procedure,
under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new
circuit breaker may trip to stop the ones. For replacement instructions,
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the MIST : Mist (for a single wipe)
F11-43. OFF : Off
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker INT: Intermittent
will reset itself, and the wipers will LO: Low speed
again operate normally. HI: High speed
. Clean your wiper blades and win- To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
dow glass periodically with a washer control lever down.
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
road film. Keep the washer button the “OFF” position.
depressed at least for 1 second so that For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
washer solution will be sprinkled all lever up. The wipers operate until you
over the windshield or rear window. release the lever.
Instruments and controls 3-33
! Wiper intermittent time control NOTE
! Windshield washer
– CONTINUED –
3-34 Instruments and controls
& Rear window wiper and lever to the “R” position (AT and CVT Defogger and deicer
washer switch (Outback) models) or the shift lever to the reverse
position (MT models), the rear wiper will
switch to continuous operation. When you
move the select lever/shift lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever upward to
the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation) wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
ON: Continuous end of the wiper control lever downward to
INT: Intermittent the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
OFF: Off
and the wiper operates until you release
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
the knob.
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT” 1) Rear window defogger
position, the rear wiper will operate inter- 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
mittently at intervals corresponding to the 3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
vehicle speed.
The vehicle is equipped with a rear
When you subsequently move the select
Instruments and controls 3-35
window defogger. Some models are also completely before that time, press the
equipped with an outside mirror defogger control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
and/or windshield wiper deicer. The de- ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
fogger and deicer system is activated only you have to press the control switch to
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” turn them on again.
position.
The defogger and deicer system setting
can be changed for continuous operation
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
the defogger and deicer system is can-
Automatic climate control system celed and the system stops operating.
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the control switch that is CAUTION
located on the climate control panel. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror . To prevent the battery from being
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are discharged, do not operate the
Manual climate control system activated simultaneously. The indicator defogger and deicer system con-
light on the control switch illuminates while tinuously for any longer than
the defogger and deicer system is acti- necessary.
vated. . Do not use sharp instruments or
To turn them off, press the control switch window cleaner containing abra-
again. They also turn off when the ignition sives to clean the inner surface
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK” of the rear window. They may
position. damage the conductors printed
on the window.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirror have been cleared and the wind-
shield wiper blades have been deiced
– CONTINUED –
3-36 Instruments and controls
button, the compass display is toggled on other similar items. Periodically wipe the ! Compass zone adjustment
or off. When the compass is on, an sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
1. The zone setting is factory preset to
illuminated compass reading will appear cotton cloth or an applicator.
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration
in the lower part of the mirror. ! Compass calibration zone” map attached to the end of this
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all manual to verify that the compass zone
the mirror surface turns bright if the nonessential electrical accessories (rear setting is correct for your geographical
transmission is shifted into reverse. This window defogger, heater/air conditioning location.
is to ensure good rearward visibility during system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all 2. Press and hold the right button for 3
reversing. doors are shut. seconds then release, and the word
2. Drive to an open, level area away from “ZONE” will briefly appear and then the
! Photosensors zone number will be displayed.
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the 3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
“ON” position. to cycle the display through all possible
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 zone settings. Stop cycling when the
seconds then release, and the compass correct zone setting for your location is
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and displayed.
direction will be displayed. 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” exit the zone setting mode.
disappears from the display (approxi-
mately two or three circles). The compass
is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside influences cause the mirror
The mirror has a photosensor attached on to read inaccurately. You will know that
both the front and back sides. If the glare this has occurred if your compass begins
from the headlights of vehicles behind you to read in only limited directions. Should
strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it you encounter this situation, return to step
and make the reflection surface of the one of the above procedure and recali-
mirror dimmer to help prevent you from brate the mirror.
being blinded. For this reason, use care
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
– CONTINUED –
3-38 Instruments and controls
& Outside mirrors ! Remote control mirror switch Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/
Objects look smaller in a convex telescopic position while driving.
mirror and farther away than when This may cause loss of vehicle
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use control and result in personal injury.
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and dis-
tance of objects that you view in
convex mirror. The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“Acc” position.
1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust
the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to
adjust the right-hand mirror.
2. Move the knob in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
3. Return the knob to the neutral position 1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
to prevent unintentional operation. “Front seats” F1-2.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- 2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
ally. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
Instruments and controls 3-39
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection
Climate control 4-3
1) Open
2) Close
1) Open
2) Close Move the tab up and down or right and left
to adjust the flow direction.
Move the tab up and down or right and left
to adjust the flow direction. To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
open/close wheel upward to the “ ”
To open the ventilator, turn the center grille
position.
open/close wheel to the “ ” position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
To close it, turn the wheel to the “ ” “ ” position.
position.
4-4 Climate control
! Fan speed control dial This dial regulates the temperature of air : Air flows through the instrument panel
flow from the air outlets over a range from outlets and the windshield defroster out-
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm). lets.
! Air flow control buttons NOTE
When the “ ” button or “ ” button is
pressed the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to quickly
defog the windshield. However the
indicator on the air conditioner button
will not illuminate. At the same time,
the air inlet selection is automatically
set to “outside air” mode.
– CONTINUED –
4-6 Climate control
3. Turn the temperature control dial all foot outlets is slightly warmer than from WARNING
the way to the right. the instrument panel outlets.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the Continued operation in the ON posi-
highest speed. OFF position. tion may fog up the windows. Switch
2. Press the “ ” button. to the OFF position as soon as the
! Heating and defrosting 3. Set the temperature control dial to the outside dusty condition clears.
To direct warm air toward the floor and the desired temperature level.
windshield: 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the & Air conditioner operation
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the desired speed.
OFF position. ! Cooling or dehumidifying
Setting the temperature control dial fully For cooling and dehumidification of the
2. Press the “ ” button.
turned to the red area or blue area passenger compartment, air flows through
3. Set the temperature control dial to the decreases the temperature difference
most comfortable level. the instrument panel outlets:
between the air from the instrument panel
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
desired speed. OFF position.
! Ventilation 2. Press the “ ” button.
! Heating To force outside air through the instrument 3. Set the air conditioner button to the
To direct warm air toward the floor: panel outlets: “ON” position.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 4. Set the temperature control dial to the
OFF position. OFF position. blue side.
2. Press the “ ” button. 2. Press the “ ” button. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 3. Set the temperature control dial all the desired speed.
most comfortable level. way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the ! Defrosting or defogging
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed. desired speed. To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
! Bi-level heating When driving on a dusty road, set the air 1. Press the “ ” button.
inlet control button to the ON position.
This setting allows you to direct air of 2. Set the temperature control dial to the
different temperatures from the instrument red side.
panel and foot outlets. The air from the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
– CONTINUED –
4-8 Climate control
NOTE Automatic climate control The temperature can be set within a range
When the “ ” button or “ ” button is of 61 to 898F (18.5 to 31.58C).
system (if equipped)
pressed the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to quickly
defog the windshield. However the NOTE
indicator on the air conditioner button . Operate the automatic climate con-
will not illuminate. At the same time, trol system when the engine is running.
the air inlet selection is automatically . The blower fan rotates at a low
set to “outside air” mode. speed when the engine coolant tem-
perature is low.
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-
cator light on the control panel illumi-
nates.
The automatic climate control system
automatically controls outlet air tempera-
ture, fan speed, air flow distribution air-
inlet control, and air conditioner compres-
sor operation. It activates when the fan
speed control button or the “AUTO” button
is pressed, and is used to maintain a
constant, comfortable climate within the
passenger compartment. If you press the
defroster button while the automatic cli-
mate control system is deactivated, only
the defroster function will be activated.
Climate control 4-9
– CONTINUED –
4-10 Climate control
! AUTO button you operated. To change the system back ! Temperature control button
FULL AUTO mode operation: to the FULL AUTO mode, press the
“AUTO” button.
! OFF button
Driver’s side
When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the
indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display
illuminates. In this state, fan speed, air The automatic climate control system
flow distribution, air-inlet control, and air turns off (the air conditioner compressor
conditioner compressor operation are and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is
automatically controlled. pressed.
AUTO mode operation: When the “OFF” button is pressed, the
If you operate any of the buttons on the outside air circulation mode (air inlet
control panel other than the “OFF” button, selection OFF) is automatically selected.
rear window defogger button and tem-
perature control buttons during FULL
AUTO mode operation, the indicator light
“FULL” on the control panel will turn off Passenger’s side
and the indicator light “AUTO” will remain
illuminated. You can then manually control To increase the temperature setting, press
the system as desired using the button the “ ” side of the temperature control
Climate control 4-11
button. To decrease the temperature To deactivate the DUAL mode: After eliminating the fogging from the
setting, press the “ ” side of the tempera- Press the “DUAL” button again. When the windshield, return the climate control
ture control button. DUAL mode is deactivated, the indicator system to the FULL AUTO mode by
Each temperature setting is shown on the light on the “DUAL” button turns off and pressing the “AUTO” button or turn off by
display. When the “LO” is shown, the the temperature setting for the front pressing the “OFF” button.
system provides maximum cooling perfor- passenger’s side becomes the same as Alternatively, press the “ ” button again
mance. When the “HI” is shown, the the setting for the driver’s side. to return the system to the setting that was
system provides maximum heating perfor- ! – Defroster button selected before you activated the defros-
mance. ter.
! DUAL mode ! Fan speed control button
– CONTINUED –
4-12 Climate control
! A/C – Air conditioner button ! Air flow mode selection button NOTE
When the “ ” mode is selected, the air
conditioner compressor automatically
operates to quickly defog the wind-
shield and the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the “outside air”
mode.
! Air inlet selection button
If the windshield starts to fog when the Select the desired air flow mode by
climate control system is operated in the pressing the air flow mode selection
AUTO mode, press the air conditioner button. The selected air flow mode is
button “A/C” to defog and dehumidify. shown on the display.
When this button is pressed, the air
conditioner compressor turns on and the (Ventilation): Air flows through the
indicator light “A/C” on the display illumi- instrument panel outlets.
nates. To turn off the air conditioner (Bi-level): Air flows through the instru-
compressor, press the “A/C” button again. ment panel outlets and the foot outlets. Select air flow by pressing the air inlet
selection button “ ”.
NOTE (Heat): Air flows through the instrument ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
The air conditioner compressor does panel outlets, the foot outlets, and some recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
not operate when the outside air tem- through the windshield defroster outlets. air inlet selection button to the ON position
perature is below 328F (08C). for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
(Heat-def): Air flows through the instru-
when driving on a dusty road. The
ment panel outlets, the windshield defros-
indicator light will illuminate.
ter outlets, and the foot outlets.
OFF position (outside Air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Climate control 4-13
Press the air inlet selection button to the & Temperature sensors and become damaged, the system may
OFF position when the interior has cooled not be able to control the interior tempera-
to a comfortable temperature and the road ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will sensors, observe the following precau-
turn off. tions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
WARNING – Keep water away from the sensors.
Continued operation in the ON posi- – Do not cover the sensors.
tion (recirculation) may fog up the
The sensors are located as follows:
windows. Switch to the OFF position
(outside air) as soon as the outside – Solar sensor: beside windshield
dusty condition clears. defroster grille
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center
NOTE panel
When driving on a dusty road or behind – Outside temperature sensor: behind
a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust front grille.
gases, set the air inlet selection button
to the ON position (recirculation).
From time to time, return the air inlet
selection button to the OFF position
(outside air) to draw outside air into the
passenger compartment.
1) Solar sensor
2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
4-14 Climate control
Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker system.
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
& Cleaning ventilator grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.
Replacement schedule:
Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the (2) Remove the damper shaft from the
following occurs, even if it is not yet glove box.
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the air flow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or 2. Remove the cover of the air filter.
misted.
– CONTINUED –
4-16 Climate control
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Audio
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . If you are driving in an area with tall
covered parking area trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
. If you are driving beneath the top level for example on a road that goes through a
of a multi-level freeway dense forest
. If you drive under a bridge . The signal can become weak in some
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle areas that are not covered by the repeater
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the station network.
signal Please note that these may be other
The signal comes from the south and may . If you are driving in a valley where the unforeseen circumstances when there
not be able to reach the antenna in some surrounding hills or peaks block the signal are problems with the reception of XMTM
circumstances when you are driving north. from the south satellite radio signals.
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains
5-4 Audio
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-14
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-18
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-28
– CONTINUED –
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-14
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-18
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-28
Audio 5-7
Power and sound controls & Sound control ! Other sound setting controls (type
A audio)
& Power switch and volume ! Tone and balance control
control
Choose the desired level for each mode Choose the desired settings for each
by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. mode by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi- The control function returns to the tune/
mately 5 seconds. track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
– CONTINUED –
5-8 Audio
& FM selection
! Seek tuning (SEEK) ! Scan tuning (SCAN) tall buildings and hills.
! PTY (Program type) group tuning
(only FM reception)
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio
“SEEK” button briefly, the radio will auto- will switch to the scan mode. In this mode,
matically search for a receivable station the radio scans through the radio band Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to
and stop at the first one it finds. This until a station is found. The radio will stop the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
function may not be available, however, at the station for 5 seconds while display- PTY group that you are currently listening
when radio signals are weak. In such a ing the frequency, after which scanning to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTY
situation, perform manual tuning to select will continue until the entire band has been selection mode, “PTY SEL” is displayed
the desired station. scanned. on the screen.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode. If you press the “SCAN”
button while the radio is stopped at a
station, the radio stays stopped at that
station. If you press the button while the
radio is scanning, the radio stops at the
next receivable station.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
– CONTINUED –
5-12 Audio
! PTY (Program type) group selection ! Seek in PTY (Program type) group & RDS text display
In PTY selection mode, press the “PTY” In the PTY selection mode, when the If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
button “ ” or “ ” to change the PTY desired PTY group has been selected, RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
group by one step at a time. pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” the “TEXT” button changes the display
Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group up seeks within that PTY group. In this case, among PS, RT and frequency. The initial
by one step. Pressing “ ” changes the “PTY SEEK” is displayed on the screen. setting is “PS”.
PTY group down by one step. Pressing “ ” seeks up. Pressing “ ”
This operation only changes the display. It seeks down. NOTE
does not change the station that is The control function returns to the normal . The maximum number of characters
currently being received. mode after approximately 10 seconds. that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for RT is 64.
. If RT is 16 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
the page.
Audio 5-13
mode received before pressing the button. Satellite radio operation (if
– Switching to the other band equipped)
– Press the “A.S” button
– Press the “SCAN” button To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
– Press the “SEEK” button install the SUBARU genuine satellite
– Press any of the preset buttons receiver (dealer option) and to enter into
– Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial a contract. For details, please contact your
– Turn off the audio system SUBARU dealer.
– Turn off the ignition switch
. When you use the Auto-store func- & XMTM satellite radio
tion while selecting the FM mode, even XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite
if you have selected the FM1 or FM2 radio service, including music, news,
station, the new stations are stored in sports, talk and children’s programming.
the FM3 station. XMTM provides digital quality audio and
. If it is only possible to receive less text information, including song title and
than 6 stations, the available stations artist name. A service fee is required to
are stored from preset 1 in order by receive the XM TM service. For more
frequency and the unused preset but- information, contact XMTM at
tons are not registered to a station. www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-
Also, the previously registered station RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.,
memories of the unused preset buttons www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-
are cleared. 877-438-9677) for Canada.
. If no stations can be received, the
previously stored stations are not re- & Sirius satellite radio
placed. Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
. After pressing the “A.S” button, if that allows the listener to experience
more than 1 station is stored, the radio digital sound quality and to have a greater
receives the station stored in preset 1. variety of channels.
. After pressing the “A.S” button, if no Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
stations are stored, the radio receives tuner, antenna and a service contract. For
the band and station that the radio details, please contact your SUBARU
Audio 5-15
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at you activate satellite radio and receive on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS satellite radio customer support. tion.
(7474) for more information. Sirius, the The satellite radio ID can be found on the
Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos audio display by tuning the channel to & Channel and category selec-
are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio “000”. tion
Inc. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
the satellite radio channel. ! Channel selection by operating the
& Satellite radio reception dial
Satellite radio signals are best received in NOTE
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In For Sirius, change the display to an
areas where there are tall buildings, trees, indication mode other than the channel
tunnels or other structures that may number after performing the above
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there operation.
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
stances that may result in signal loss & Band selection
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
or driving on the lower level of a multi-
tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
To help reduce this condition, satellite
radio providers have installed ground-
based repeaters in heavily populated
areas. However, you may still experience Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
reception problems in some areas. wise to select the next channel and turn
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counterclock-
& Displaying satellite radio ID wise to select the previous channel.
of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
its unique satellite radio tuner ID. off to turn on the radio.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when Press the “SAT” button when the radio is
– CONTINUED –
5-16 Audio
When in the SAT mode, press the “SEEK” To activate the category search mode,
When in the SAT mode, briefly press the button “ ” or “ ” continuously to press the “PTY/CAT” button. To deactivate
“SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” to select the change to the channel selection mode. the category search mode, press the
channel. Pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” changes “PTY/CAT” button again.
the channel up by 10 steps each time.
Pressing “ ” changes the channel down
by 10 steps each time.
pressing the “FOLDER” button “ ” the ALL SCAN mode, the radio scans all ! How to preset channels
changes the category up by one step. channels.
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
Pressing “ ” changes the category down In both SCAN modes, the radio will stop at SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
by one step. the station for 5 seconds while displaying
2. Select the desired channel.
When a category is selected, pressing the the channel number, after which scanning
“SEEK” button selects channels only with- will continue until the entire channel has 3. Press one of the preset buttons for
in the selected category. been scanned from the low end to the high more than 1.5 seconds to store the
end. channel. If the button is pressed for less
The control function returns to the normal
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
mode after approximately 10 seconds. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
will remain in memory.
! Channel scan the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
NOTE
& Channel preset If the connection between the radio and
battery is broken for any reason such
as vehicle maintenance or radio re-
moval, all channels stored in the preset
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reset the preset channels.
! Selecting preset channels
Presetting a channel with a preset button
allows you to select that channel in a
single operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
If you press the “SCAN” button while the
radio is in the category search mode, the
radio turns to the category SCAN mode. In
the category SCAN mode, the radio scans Preset buttons
only channels in the selected category.
If you press the “SCAN” button while the
radio is not in the category search mode,
the radio turns to the ALL SCAN mode. In
– CONTINUED –
5-18 Audio
if you press “FM”, “AM” or “SAT” button, 4. When the magazine is filled with discs ! When CD is in the player (type A)/
the player will enter standby mode. Press by repeating steps 2 and 3, the player will When playing back all CDs in the
the “CD/AUX” button to start playback. start playback of the discs, beginning with player (type B)
! Loading all the magazine (full disc the one inserted first.
loading mode) If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
& How to play back a CD
NOTE
For type A audio, if a disc that the
player cannot read has been loaded,
the player will display the message
“CHECK DISC”.
! When there is no CD inserted When the “CD/AUX” button is pressed, the
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a player will start playback.
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” CD (type A)” F5-18 / “How to insert a CD
button for more than 1.5 seconds, the (s) (type B)” F5-18.
player will produce beep sound and will When a CD is loaded, the player will start
enter the full disc loading mode. playback of the CD, beginning with the
2. When the disc number indicator first track.
flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-
nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
disc is successfully loaded during this
period, the disc number indicator will stop
blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is com-
plete, the next idle disc number indicator
will blink. Then repeat step 2.
Audio 5-21
! When selecting a CD to play (type & To select a track from its ! Backward direction
B) beginning
! Forward direction
– CONTINUED –
5-22 Audio
Type B audio
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press
the “RPT/RDM” button (type A audio) or
Audio 5-23
“RPT” button (type B audio) while the . The “DISC RPT” indication refers to & Random playback
track/file (track) is playing. the repeat playback of a disc. It repeats
Each time you briefly press the button, the the tracks on the CD. It is only possible
mode changes in the following se- to select this function for type B audio.
quences. To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play
Type A audio: mode, briefly press the “RPT” button and
select CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will
turn off, and the normal playback mode
will be resumed.
NOTE
Type B audio: The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps:
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button and Type A audio
select CANCEL (type A audio)
. Press the “RPT” button and select
CANCEL (type B audio)
NOTE . Press the “ ” button
. Press the disc select button
. The “TRACK RPT” indication refers . Press the “SCAN” button
to the repeat playback of a single track. . Press the “LOAD” button when
It repeats the track that is playing. there is free space in the CD magazine
. The “FOLDER RPT” indication re-
fers to the repeat playback of a folder. It
repeats the all of the tracks in the
folder. It is possible to select the
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for-
mat track is playing.
Type B audio
To play back a track/file(s) at random,
press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
– CONTINUED –
5-24 Audio
second or longer (type A audio) or press folder. It randomly repeats the tracks in “FOLDER” button
the “RDM” button (type B audio). the folder. It is possible to select the
. For type A audio, press the “RPT/RDM” function when an MP3/WMA/AAC for- & Scan
button for 0.5 second or longer. mat track is playing.
. For type B audio, press the “RDM” . The “DISC RDM” indication refers to
button. the random playback of a disc. It
randomly repeats the tracks in the CD.
Each time you press the button, the mode It is possible to select the function
changes in the following sequences. when an MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
Type A audio: playing.
To cancel the random playback mode,
press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer again (type A audio) or
press the “RPT” button again (type B
audio) and select CANCEL.
The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
Type B audio: normal playback mode will be resumed.
The scan mode lets you listen to the first
NOTE 10 seconds of each track/file in succes-
Random playback will be cancelled if sion. Press the “SCAN” button to start
you perform any of the following steps: scanning upward beginning with the track/
file(s) following the currently selected one.
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button for 0.5
second or longer and select CANCEL After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder have
been scanned, normal playback will be
NOTE (type A audio)
resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
. The “RDM” indication refers to the . Press the “RPT” button and select
CANCEL (type B audio) the “SCAN” button again.
random playback of the tracks. It
randomly repeats the tracks on the . Press the “ ” button NOTE
CD. It is possible to select the function . Press the disc select button
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
when formats other than the MP3/WMA/ . Press the “SCAN” button
perform any of the following steps.
AAC format CD is playing. . Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine . Press the “RPT” button
. The “FOLDER RDM” indication re- . Press the “RDM” button
fers to the random playback in the . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
Audio 5-25
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button next one in the following sequence. NOTE
. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial For CD-DA: The display is designed to show titles
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the for up to 30 characters.
“FOLDER” button
. Press the “ ” button
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the & Folder selection
“SEEK” button For MP3/WMA/AAC:
. Press the disc select button
. Select the radio or AUX mode
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment ! Page (track/folder title) scroll
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position
“FOLDER” button starts playback be- & How to eject CDs from the
ginning with the first track/file (track). player (type B)
NOTE
& How to eject a CD from the . Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
player (type A) sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you do not remove the ejected
disc within approximately 15 seconds,
a disc protection function will operate,
automatically reloading the disc. In this
case, the disc is not played.
! Ejecting a CD from the player
2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The
selected disc will be ejected. The disc
number indicator will flash at this time.
When you remove the ejected disc, the
disc number indicator will turn off.
When a disc is being played back or when To remove more discs in succession,
a disc is in the player, press the eject repeat steps 1 and 2.
button “ ”. The disc will be ejected.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you do not remove the ejected Disc select buttons
disc within approximately 15 seconds,
1. Use the disc select button to select the
a disc protection function will operate,
disc to be ejected.
automatically reloading the disc. In this
case, the disc is not played.
Audio 5-27
! Ejecting all discs from the player . If you press the “CD/AUX” button or Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
(all disc ejection mode) “LOAD” button while the player is in all CDs are not supported) and data format
disc ejection mode, the player will draw are correct. This player can only play CD-
in the discs that have been ejected and DA, MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If
play them. the disc cannot be unloaded or this
message remains displayed, please con-
& When the following mes- tact your SUBARU dealer.
sages are displayed
If one of the following messages is
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the follow-
ing information. If you cannot clear those
messages, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
1. If you press the “ ” button for 1.5 Press the eject button to unload the disc.
seconds or longer, the player will produce Check the disc for damage or deforma-
beep sound and will enter the all disc tion, and also check that the correct disc is
ejection mode. At this time, the disc inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
number indicator and “ALL EJECT” indi- forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
cator will flash. are not supported, and if inserted, they will
2. Remove the disc that has been be immediately ejected. If the disc cannot
ejected. The other discs loaded will then be unloaded or this message remains
be ejected one after another. displayed, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
. If you press the “ ” button while Press the eject button to unload the discs.
the player is in all disc ejection mode, Check that the disc is not damaged or
the mode will be cancelled following scratched, and also check that the disc is
ejection of the disc that is currently inserted correctly. This message may
being ejected. appear when using some CD-RW discs.
5-28 Audio
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface Audio control buttons
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a rough cloth,
(if equipped)
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
Type A audio
Type B audio
Audio 5-31
These buttons are located on the spokes *3: Only when an auxiliary audio product is the switch to the “ ” side to skip back-
of the steering wheel. They allow the connected. ward in the track/file (track) order.
driver to control audio functions without *4: Only when an iPod is connected using the The track/file (track) number will be shown
taking his/her hands off the steering iPod adapter that is available as a dealer on the audio display.
wheel. option. ! With SAT mode selected
& MODE button & “ ” and “ ” switch Press the switch to the “ ” side to skip
forward in the channel order. Press the
switch to the “ ” side to skip backward in
the channel order. When the switch is
briefly pressed, the channel will skip every
1 channel. When the switch is pressed for
more than 0.5 second, the channel will
skip every 10 channels. The channel will
be shown on the audio display.
side to reduce the volume. Hands-free system (if & Tips for the Hands-free sys-
A number indicating the volume will be equipped) tem
shown on the audio display.
! Bluetooth®
& MUTE button (if equipped) NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
. When selling your vehicle, make
sure that you initialize the Hands-free
system to prevent personal data from
being improperly accessed.
The Hands-free system operates while the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
NOTE
Press this button if you wish to immedi- The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
ately cut the volume to zero. registered trademarks of Bluetooth
The audio display will show “MUTE”. SIG, Inc.
If you press the button again, the original It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
sound volume will return and “MUTE” in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
turns off. tooth® format (wireless) to make a phone
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take
an incoming phone call.
Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless,
a connection between the in-vehicle
equipment and the cell phone can be
made without placing them in close vicinity
of each other. The cell phone can be used
Audio 5-33
with it left in the breast pocket or bag. ence, and (2) this device must accept . Reorient or relocate the receiving
any interference received, including antenna.
NOTE interference that may cause undesired . Increase the separation between the
The Hands-free system may not oper- operation. equipment and receiver.
ate properly under the following condi- Changes or modifications not ex- . Connect the equipment into an out-
tions. pressly approved by the party respon- let on a circuit different from that to
. The cell phone is turned off. sible for compliance could void the which the receiver is connected.
. The cell phone is not in the phone user’s authority to operate the equip- . Consult the dealer or an experi-
call area. ment. enced radio/TV technician for help.
. The battery of the call phone has run
down. NOTE & Safety precautions
. The cell phone is not connected to This equipment has been tested and
the Hands-free system. found to comply with the limits for a
. The cell phone is behind the seat or
WARNING
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
in the glove box. 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are . For safety reasons, avoid operat-
. A metal material covers or touches designed to provide reasonable protec- ing of the cell phone while driv-
the cell phone. tion against harmful interference in a ing.
! Corresponding profiles for the cell residential installation. This equipment . Do not make a phone call while
phone may cause harmful interference to driving. When you have an in-
radio communications, if it is not coming call, stop the vehicle in a
. HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0 installed and used in accordance with safe location before taking the
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1 the instructions. However, there is no incoming phone call. When you
guarantee that interference will not have to absolutely take a phone
& Certification for the Hands- occur in a particular installation. If this call, tell the caller “I’ll call you
free system equipment does cause harmful inter- back”. And then call the caller
ference to radio or television reception, back after stopping the vehicle in
NOTE which can be determined by turning the
This device complies with Part 15 of a safe location.
equipment off and on, the user is
the FCC Rules and with RSS-Gen of IC . Part 15 FCC Rules
encouraged to try to correct the inter-
Rules. Operation is subject to the ference by one or more of the following FCC Warning:
following two conditions: (1) This de- measures. Any unauthorized changes of
vice may not cause harmful interfer- modifications to this equipment
– CONTINUED –
5-34 Audio
would void the user’s authority to as “other radio stations”.) Before & Using the Hands-free system
operate this device. using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio ! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
stations” are being operated in
CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental
radio interference from this
. Do not leave the cell phone in the equipment to “other radio sta-
vehicle. The temperature in the tions”, move the equipment to
vehicle may become extremely another location as soon as
high and cause a malfunction of possible to avoid radio interfer-
the cell phone. ence. The frequency band used
. When using the cell phone, be by this equipment is in the 2.4
careful not to get it close to the GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it is employed as a modulation
too close to the in-vehicle equip- method. The expected inflicting
ment may result in deterioration interference distance is less than
in tone quality or a poor connect- 33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses 1) OFF hook switch
ing condition. a full band and can avoid a band 2) ON hook switch
. In the frequency band used by used by a movable body identifi-
To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
this equipment, along with indus- cation device.
OFF hook switch. To turn off the Hands-
trial, scientific and medical free mode, press the ON hook switch.
equipment such as a microwave
oven, radio stations (a license is ! Preparation for using the Hands-
required) to be used by the free system
production line in the factory to Before using the Hands-free system, it is
identify movable bodies, specific necessary to register a cell phone in the
small power radio stations (a system. Perform the following procedure
license is not required) and ama- to register a cell phone.
teur radio stations (a license is 1. Press the OFF hook switch.
required) are being operated. 2. Select “Set up” by operating the
(These three types of radio sta- “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
tions are hereinafter referred to 3. Select “Phone setup” by operating the
Audio 5-35
– CONTINUED –
5-36 Audio
– CONTINUED –
5-38 Audio
Go Back —
Redial — — Redialing
Callback — — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Audio 5-39
*: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
– CONTINUED –
5-40 Audio
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Interior equipment
Interior light . The doors or the rear gate (Outback) & Map light
are unlocked using the remote keyless
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the entry transmitter.
light is turned off to avoid battery dis- . The ignition switch is turned from the
charge. “Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto- & Cargo area light (Outback)
light is turned off to avoid battery dis- matically in the following cases.
charge. . Any of the doors (other than the rear
! Door interlock switch gate or trunk lid) is opened. The map lights
do not illuminate when only the rear gate
is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
closed. While the lights are on, if any of 1) DOOR
the following operations are performed, 2) OFF
the map lights turn off immediately. 3) ON
1) Door interlock switch
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON” The cargo area light switch has three
Although the map light switches are in the position. positions.
OFF position (manually off), the map lights . All doors are locked using the remote DOOR: The light illuminates only when
can be set to illuminate automatically in keyless entry transmitter. the rear gate is opened.
conjunction with a door opening, etc. by OFF: The light remains off.
use of the door interlock switch. The door The setting of the period for which the ON: The light remains on continuously.
interlock switch has the following two lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
positions. changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact The automatically illuminated cargo area
your SUBARU dealer for details. light remains on for several seconds and
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate then gradually turns off after the rear gate
automatically in conjunction with a door is closed. While the light is on, if any of the
opening. But, the lights can be turned on following operations are performed, the
manually by pressing the map light cargo area light turns off immediately.
switches.
– CONTINUED –
6-4 Interior equipment
. The ignition switch is turned from the Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. The rear gate is locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
– CONTINUED –
6-6 Interior equipment
& Glove box & Center console box To use as storage space:
! Center console box (front)
To use again as cup holders: ment and a lower compartment. ! Lower compartment
! Upper compartment
Insert the divider plate into the console 1) Lower compartment lock release
box.
1) Upper compartment lock release Pull up the lower compartment lock
! Center console box (rear)
Pull up the upper compartment lock release to open the lower compartment.
release to open the upper compartment.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might burn you or
your passengers. Spilled bev-
erages may also damage uphols-
To open the console, push on the lid lightly tery or carpets.
and it will automatically open. CAUTION
CAUTION Do not use the pocket as an ashtray
or leave a lighted cigarette in the
When your vehicle is parked in the pocket. This could cause a fire.
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
the overhead console heats up. To use the pocket, open the lid.
Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
vulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
Interior equipment 6-9
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, The coat hook is attached to each rear
they could cause serious injuries by passenger’s hand grip.
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing correct airbag deploy-
ment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
6-14 Interior equipment
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
& Legacy
– CONTINUED –
6-16 Interior equipment
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up. 3. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
2. Hold down the button on the right-
hand rear quarter panel and lift up the
right-hand cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.
& To install the cover housing cargo area cover behind the rear seat. Convenient tie-down hooks
(if equipped)
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
Outback
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.
Interior equipment 6-19
Rear view camera (if A rear view camera is attached to the electric shock.
trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback).
equipped)
When the ignition switch is “ON” and the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever (AT CAUTION
or CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear . If your vehicle is washed with a
view image from the vehicle on the high-pressure washer, do not
navigation monitor. allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
WARNING camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
. Since the rear view camera uses electric shock.
a wide-angle lens, the image on . Since the camera is a precision
the monitor is different from the device, do not subject it to strong
actual view in terms of distance. impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
. Since the range of the image on fire or electric shock may occur.
Legacy the monitor is limited, you should . If mud or snow sticks to or is
always check the rear view and frozen on the camera, you must
the surrounding area with your be very careful removing it.
eyes and mirrors, and move Otherwise, damage done to the
backward at a slow speed. Mov- camera may cause a fire or
ing backward only by checking electric shock. Pour water or
the monitor could cause an acci- lukewarm water over the camera
dent. to remove mud and ice, and wipe
. Do not disassemble or modify the it with a soft, dry cloth.
camera, switch or wiring. If . Do not put a flame close to the
smoke comes out or you smell camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
a strange odor, stop using the mage or fire may occur.
rear view camera immediately.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
Contact your SUBARU dealer
to use a fuse with the specified
Outback for an inspection. Continued use
rating. Use of a fuse with a
may result in accident, fire or
different rating may result in a
– CONTINUED –
6-20 Interior equipment
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly. Image from camera
Range of view The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
– CONTINUED –
6-22 Interior equipment
! When there is an upward slope at the ! When there is a downward slope at ! Feature of distance marker
back the back
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks farther The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Starting and operating
Fuel engine performance and driveability, it is damage the emission control system and
required that you use premium grade may impair driveability and fuel economy.
unleaded gasoline. ! California fuel
CAUTION
NOTE If your vehicle was certified to California
Use of a fuel which is low in quality Be sure to use premium unleaded Emission Standards as indicated on the
or use of an inappropriate fuel gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for a turbo underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
additive may cause engine damage. engine model. If other gasoline (lower optimize engine and emission control
than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, re- system performance with gasoline that
duced output and poor accelerator meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
& Fuel requirements response will result. fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
! Non-turbo models ! Fuel octane rating vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
The non-turbo engine is designed to This octane rating is the average of the Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
operate using unleaded gasoline with an Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. numbers and is commonly referred to as sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
! Turbo models
Using a gasoline with a lower octane and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
The engine is designed to operate at smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
maximum performance using unleaded rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine. a different brand of unleaded gasoline
gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI having lower sulfur to determine if the
or higher. If 93 AKI fuel is not readily Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive problem is fuel related before returning
available in your area, unleaded gasoline your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
with an octane rating of 91 AKI may be up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
dealer or a qualified service technician if service. The CHECK ENGINE warning
used with no detriment to engine durability light/malfunction indicator lamp may also
or driveability. However, you may notice a you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or turn on. If this occurs, return to your
slight decrease in maximum engine per- authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.
formance while using 91 AKI fuel. Use of persistently.
If it is determined that the condition is
91 AKI fuel will not affect your warranty ! Unleaded gasoline caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
coverage. If premium unleaded gasoline is The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed may not be covered by your warranty.
not available, regular unleaded gasoline to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher nozzle. Under no circumstances should
may be temporarily used. For optimum leaded gasoline be used because it will
Starting and operating 7-3
! MMT need to add any fuel system cleaning Methanol can be used in your vehicle
Some gasoline contains an octane-en- agents to your fuel tank. ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- mixture AND if it is accompanied by
Many gasolines are now blended with sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If materials called oxygenates. Use of these
you use such fuels, your emission control vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
system performance may deteriorate and Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol under these conditions.
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
happens, return to your authorized your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
determined that the condition is caused proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not line before seeking service at your
be covered by your warranty. In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability
! Gasoline for cleaner air which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
CAUTION reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con- you should ask your service station & Fuel filler lid and cap
taining alcohol may cause paint operators if their gasolines contain deter- ! Refueling
damage, which is not covered under gents and oxygenates and if they have
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- Only one person should be involved in
sions. refueling. Do not allow others to approach
Your use of gasoline with detergent the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels pipe while refueling is in progress.
forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the Be sure to observe any other precautions
This helps keep your engine in tune and following. that are posted at the service station.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual.
high quality fuel with the proper detergent . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
and other additives, you should never sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
– CONTINUED –
7-4 Starting and operating
1) Open
2. Open the fuel filler lid.
2) Close
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
mage to the fuel system. State emission testing (U.S. in order to meet their obligation under
federal law to implement stricter vehicle
. After refueling, turn the cap to the only) emission standards to reduce air pollution
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-
not securely tightened, fuel may WARNING mill or roller-like testing device that allows
leak out while the vehicle is being your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the
driven or fuel spillage could Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle vehicle remains in one place. Depending
occur in the event of an accident, must NEVER be performed on a on the severity of a state’s air pollution
creating a fire hazard. single two-wheel dynamometer. At- problems, the states must adopt either a
tempting to do so will result in “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior uncontrolled vehicle movement and inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
surfaces of the vehicle. Because may cause an accident or injuries to basic emission test consists of an emis-
fuel may damage the paint, be persons nearby. sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle
quickly. Paint damage caused by for a short period of time. States with more
spilled fuel is not covered under CAUTION severe air pollution problems are required
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
. Always use a genuine SUBARU Resultant vehicle damage due to test. This test simulates actual driving
fuel filler cap. If you use the improper testing is not covered conditions on a dynamometer and permits
wrong cap, it may not fit, and under the SUBARU Limited War- more accurate measurement of tailpipe
your fuel tank and emission con- ranty and is the responsibility of emitted pollution than the basic emission
trol system may be damaged. It the state inspection program or its test.
could also lead to fuel spillage contractors or licensees. The U.S. Environmental Protection
and a fire. Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
At state inspection time, remember to dynamometers in their emission testing
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
tell your inspection or service station in programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU
whenever the low fuel warning
advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the
light illuminates. Engine misfires
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- testing program that involves a two-wheel
as a result of an empty tank
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- dynamometer.
could cause damage to the en-
sion damage will result.
gine.
There are some states that use four-wheel
Some states have started using dynam- dynamometers in their testing programs.
ometers in their state inspection programs When properly used, that equipment will
Starting and operating 7-7
not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle. not properly operating or there is one or Preparing to drive
Under no circumstances should the rear more diagnostic trouble codes stored in
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK You should perform the following checks
should the driveshaft be disconnected for ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated. and adjustments every day before you
state emission testing. . A state emission inspection may reject start driving.
The EPA has issued regulations for (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic OBD system readiness monitors “Not lights are clean and unobstructed.
(OBD) system as part of the state emis- Ready” is greater than one. Under this 2. Check the appearance and condition
sions inspection. The OBD system is condition, the vehicle operator should be of the tires. Also check tires for proper
designed to detect engine and transmis- instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few inflation.
sion problems that might cause vehicle days to set the monitors and return for an
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
emissions to exceed allowable limits. emission re-inspection.
leaks.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
year and newer passenger cars and light should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of service.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
Columbia have implemented the OBD 6. Check the adjustment of the inside
system inspection. and outside mirrors.
. The inspection of the OBD system 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
consists of a visual operational check of passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator lamp (MIL) and an 8. Check the operation of the warning
examination of the OBD system with an and indicator lights when the ignition
electronic scan tool while the engine is switch is turned to the “ON” position.
running. 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
. A vehicle passes the OBD system ing lights after starting the engine.
inspection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illumination is observed,
there is no stored diagnostic trouble
codes, and the OBD system readiness
monitors are complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is
– CONTINUED –
7-8 Starting and operating
NOTE Starting the engine (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, “LOCK” position and wait for at least
washer fluid and other fluid levels & MT models 10 seconds. After checking that the
should be checked daily, weekly or at parking brake is firmly applied, turn the
1. Apply the parking brake. ignition switch to the “START” position
fuel stops.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- while depressing the accelerator pedal
cessories. slightly (approximately a quarter of the
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor full stroke). Release the accelerator
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold pedal as soon as the engine starts.
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the engine. The starter motor will only the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
operate when the clutch pedal is de- position and wait for at least 10
pressed fully to the floor. seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” erator pedal and turn the ignition
position and check the operation of the switch to the “START” position. If the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to engine starts, quickly release the
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
CAUTION turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
Do not operate the starter motor seconds or longer, turn the ignition
continuously for more than 10 sec- switch to the “START” position without
onds. If the engine fails to start after depressing the accelerator pedal.
operating the starter for 5 to 10
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
more before trying again.
for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
Starting and operating 7-9
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
lights have turned off after the engine has position and check the operation of the erator pedal and turn the ignition
started. The fuel injection system auto- warning and indicator lights. Refer to switch to the “START” position. If the
matically lowers the idle speed as the “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. engine starts, quickly release the
engine warms up. accelerator pedal.
CAUTION (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo models) the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
Do not operate the starter motor position. After waiting for 10 seconds
To protect the engine while the shift continuously for more than 10 sec- or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
lever is in the neutral position, the onds. If the engine fails to start after “START” position without depressing
engine is controlled so that the engine operating the starter for 5 to 10 the accelerator pedal.
speed may not become too high even if seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
the accelerator pedal is depressed (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
more before trying again.
hard. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
& AT and CVT models position without depressing the accelera-
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
CAUTION started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started.
matically lowers the idle speed as the
If you restart the engine while the If the engine does not start, perform the engine warms up.
vehicle is moving, shift the select following procedure.
lever into the “N” position. Do not (1) Turn the ignition switch to the While the engine is warming up, make
attempt to place the select lever of a “LOCK” position and wait for at least sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
moving vehicle into the “P” posi- 10 seconds. After checking that the “N” position and that the parking brake is
tion. parking brake is firmly applied, turn the applied.
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo and 3.6 L
1. Apply the parking brake. models)
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- full stroke). Release the accelerator To protect the engine while the select
cessories. pedal as soon as the engine starts. lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn engine is controlled so that the engine
position (preferably “P” position). The the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” speed may not become too high even if
starter will only operate when the select position and wait for at least 10 the accelerator pedal is depressed
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
– CONTINUED –
7-10 Starting and operating
preconditions before starting, and if all transmitter is within the operating range of
safety parameters are correct, the engine the system.
will start within 5 seconds. Upon success-
ful engine start, the remote start confirma- & Remote start safety features
tion transmitter button will flash twice For safety and security reasons, the
every 5 seconds* and the vehicle will system will fail to start and honk the horn
honk the horn and flash the side marker twice or shut down the engine during
lights, tail lights and the front position remote start operation if any of the
lights once, then the lights will illuminate following occur:
and remain illuminated, indicating that the
engine is running. While the vehicle is . Any of the doors or the trunk / rear gate
operating via the remote engine start are open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
function, the power window features will honk six times and the side marker lights,
be disabled. Also, the system has a timer tail lights and the front position lights will
flash six times indicating that a vehicle
& Starting your vehicle and will shut down after 15 minutes if you
door or trunk / rear gate was open when
do not operate the vehicle. Press and hold
NOTE the “ ” button for 2 seconds to turn the the remote engine start system was
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and engine off. The remote start confirmation activated).
trunk / rear gate must be closed prior to transmitter button will flash three times* . The brake pedal is depressed
activating the remote engine start sys- indicating that the engine has shut down. . The key was already in the ignition
tem. Any open entry point will prevent If the starter cranks but does not start or switch
starting or cause the system to shut starts and stalls, the remote engine start . The engine hood is opened
down. system will power off and then attempt to . The remote start system “Service
The remote engine start function is acti- start the engine an additional three times mode” is engaged
vated by pressing the “ ” button twice unless the remote engine start system . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
within 3 seconds on your remote engine determines that a vehicle malfunction is reached a level over 3,500 RPM
start transmitter. Upon successful activa- preventing the system from starting. If the . The alarm is triggered by opening a
tion the remote start confirming transmitter engine does not start after additional door or the rear gate.
button will flash once* and the vehicle will attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate . The select lever is not in the “P”
honk the horn and flash the side marker position (AT and CVT models)
lights, tail lights and front position lights state.
once. The system will check certain *: Provided that the remote engine start In addition to the items above, if the
– CONTINUED –
7-12 Starting and operating
vehicle’s engine management system remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
determines there is a safety risk due to a arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm
vehicle related problem, the vehicle will system” F2-16.
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk 2. Enter the vehicle.
three times. 3. The engine will shut down when any
door or trunk/rear gate is opened.
NOTE
4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
. If the alarm system is armed at the
and turn to the “START” position to restart
time of remote engine start activation
the engine.
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed & Remote start confirmation
throughout the remote start run cycle. transmitter feature
. If the alarm system is disarmed at Your remote engine start transmitter is
the time of remote engine start activa- equipped with a unique bidirectional con-
tion (the security indicator light on the firmation feature. This feature will allow
combination meter is not flashing), the the transmitter’s backlit button to display
alarm system will remain disarmed the status of the system under the condi-
throughout the remote start run cycle. tion that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
& Entering the vehicle while it Typical transmitter button flash sequences
are outlined in the following chart.
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine start
system) and the engine will turn off.
Inserting the key into the ignition switch
and turning it to the “ON” position or
pressing the unlock button “ ” on the
Starting and operating 7-13
– CONTINUED –
7-14 Starting and operating
& Service mode & Remote transmitter program will flash one time.
In service mode, the remote engine start New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
function is temporarily disabled to prevent the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to
the system from unexpectedly starting the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters).
engine while being serviced. damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter
To engage or disengage service mode: desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK” position, the door is closed or
doors and the trunk/rear gate. transmitters can be programmed accord- after 2 minutes.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P” ing to the following procedure.
position (AT and CVT models) 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s & System maintenance
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal door must remain opened throughout the NOTE
entire process).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
position 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. replaced, discharged or disconnected,
5. Press and release the remote engine 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then it will be necessary to start the vehicle
start transmitter “ ” button three times. “LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, then a minimum of one time using the key
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn back to “ON” again and leave the ignition prior to activating the remote engine
each time the button is pressed. “ON” throughout the programming pro- start system. This is required to allow
cess. the vehicle electronic systems to re-
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to 4. The system will flash the side marker synchronize.
indicate that the service mode has been lights, tail lights and front position lights
and honk the horn three times, indicating ! Changing the batteries
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged. that the system has entered the transmit-
ter learn mode. CAUTION
5. Press and release the “ ” button on
NOTE the transmitter that you want to program. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
When taking your vehicle in for service, or in the remote engine start
6. The system will flash the side marker transmitter when replacing the
it is recommended that you inform the lights, tail lights and front position lights
service personnel that your vehicle is battery.
and honk the horn one time, indicating that
equipped with a remote engine start the system has learned the transmitter. . Be careful not to damage the
system. Upon successful programming, the re- printed circuit board in the re-
mote start confirmation transmitter button mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
Starting and operating 7-15
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model 1. Remove the small phillips screw lo- 3. Remove the circuit board from the
CR-2032) supplied in your remote engine cated on the back side lower left corner of bottom half of the case and remove the
start transmitter should last approximately the transmitter. batteries and replace with new ones. Be
one year, depending on usage. When the 2. Carefully pry the remote engine start sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
batteries begin to weaken, you will notice transmitter halves apart using a small flat- batteries before removing them to ensure
a decrease in range (distance from the head screwdriver. that the new batteries are inserted prop-
vehicle that your remote control operates). erly (battery “+” should be pointed away
Follow the instructions below to change from the transmitter circuit board on both
the remote engine start transmitter bat- batteries).
teries. 4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
– CONTINUED –
7-16 Starting and operating
ference, and (2) this device must Manual transmission & Selecting reverse gear
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause CAUTION
undesired operation. WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex- Shift into reverse ONLY when the
pressly approved by the party respon- Do not drive the vehicle with the vehicle has completely stopped. It
sible for compliance could void the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the may cause damage to the transmis-
user’s authority to operate the equip- clutch pedal is depressed) or with sion to try shifting into reverse when
ment and void warranty. the shift lever in the neutral position. the vehicle is moving.
. To comply with the FCC RF expo- Engine braking has no effect in
sure compliance requirements, no either of these conditions and the
change to the antenna or the device is risk of an accident is consequently
permitted. Any change to the antenna increased.
or the device could result in the device
exceeding the RF exposure require-
ments and void user’s authority to
operate the device.
1) Slider
You must raise the slider and hold it in that
position before you can move the shift
The manual transmission is a fully syn- lever to the “R” position.
chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re- To change gears, fully depress the clutch
verse-speed transmission. pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
The shift pattern is shown on the shift let up on the clutch pedal.
lever knob. If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
Starting and operating 7-17
transmission in neutral, release the clutch engine brakes when the vehicle is NOTE
pedal momentarily, and then try again. travelling on a slippery surface can Never exceed posted speed limits.
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
& Shifting speeds quence, control of the vehicle may
& Driving tips
be lost and the risk of an accident
! Recommended shifting speeds increased. Do not drive with your foot resting on the
The best compromise between fuel econ- clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
omy and vehicle performance during The following table shows the maximum hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
normal driving is ensured by shifting up speeds that are possible with each differ- upgrade. Either of those actions may
at the speeds listed in the following table. ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will cause clutch damage.
enter the red area if these speeds are Do not drive with your hand resting on the
Shift up mph (km/h) exceeded. shift lever. This may cause wear on the
1st to 2nd 15 (24) With the exception of cases where sudden transmission components.
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) acceleration is required, the vehicle When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometer’s speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
3rd to 4th 40 (64) needle inside the red area. Failure to or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
4th to 5th 45 (72) observe this precaution can lead to lower gear before the engine starts to
5th to 6th 50 (80) excessive engine wear and poor fuel labor.
economy.
mph (km/h) On steep downgrades, downshift the
! Maximum allowable speeds
Legacy transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
Gear Outback as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
WARNING Non-turbo Turbo
speed and to extend brake pad life.
models models
When shifting down a gear, ensure In this way, the engine provides a braking
1st 32 (52) 35 (56) 32 (52)
that the vehicle is not travelling at a effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
2nd 57 (92) 62 (100) 57 (92) the brakes while descending a hill, they
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
lowable Speed for the gear which is 3rd 86 (139) 94 (151) 86 (139) may overheat and not work properly.
about to be selected. Failure to 4th 114 (184) 125 (201) 115 (185) The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
observe this precaution can lead to when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
engine over-revving and this in turn rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
can result in engine damage. phenomenon does not indicate a problem.
In addition, sudden application of
7-18 Starting and operating
Automatic transmission/Con- than 5 seconds in any position mal timing after the engine has warmed
except the “N” or “P” position up.
tinuously variable transmis- . Immediately after transmission fluid
when the brake is applied or
sion when chocks are used in the is replaced, you may feel that the
wheels. This may cause the transmission operation is somewhat
The automatic transmission is electroni- unusual. This results from invalidation
transmission fluid to overheat.
cally controlled and provides 5 forward of data which the on-board computer
speeds and 1 reverse speed. The con- . Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the has collected and stored in memory to
tinuously variable transmission is electro- allow the transmission to shift at the
nically controlled and provides an infinite “R” position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current
number of forward speeds and 1 reverse condition of your vehicle. Optimized
speed. stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmis- shifting will be restored as the vehicle
Both the automatic transmission and continues to be driven for a while.
continuously variable transmission have sion.
. When driving a vehicle that is
a manual mode. . When parking the vehicle, first equipped with CVT under continuous
securely apply the parking brake heavy load conditions such as towing a
WARNING and then place the select lever in camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the “P” position. Avoid parking the engine speed or the vehicle speed
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” for a long time with the select
position into the “D” or “R” position may automatically be reduced. This is
lever in any other position as not a malfunction. This phenomenon
while depressing the accelerator doing so could result in a dead
pedal. This may cause the vehicle results from the engine control func-
battery. tion maintaining the cooling perfor-
to jump forward or backward.
mance of the vehicle. The engine and
NOTE vehicle speed will return to a normal
CAUTION speed when the engine is able to
. For AT models, when the engine maintain the optimum cooling perfor-
coolant temperature is still low, the mance after the heavy load decreases.
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
transmission will upshift to higher Driving under a heavy load must be
only after the vehicle is comple-
engine speeds than when the coolant performed with extreme care. Do not
tely stopped. Shifting while the
temperature is sufficiently high in order try to pass a vehicle in front when
vehicle is moving may cause
to shorten the warm-up time and driving on an uphill slope while towing.
damage to the transmission.
improve driveability. The gearshift tim- . The continuously variable transmis-
. Do not race the engine for more ing will automatically shift to the nor- sion is a chain type system that
Starting and operating 7-19
provides superior transmission effi- In this position, the transmission is me- transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At chanically locked to prevent the vehicle freely, even on the slightest incline unless
times, depending on varying driving from rolling freely. the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
conditions, a chain operating sound Avoid coasting with the transmission
may be heard that is characteristic of When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake fully, then shift into the “P” neutral.
this type of system. During coasting, there is no engine brak-
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission. ing effect.
& Select lever
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any NOTE
other position, you should depress the . To protect the engine while the “N”
brake pedal fully then move the select position is selected, the engine is
lever. This prevents the vehicle from controlled such that the engine speed
lurching when it is started. may not become too high even if the
accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
NOTE . If the select lever is in the “N”
To protect the engine while the “P” position when you stop the engine for
position is selected, the engine is parking, you may not subsequently be
controlled such that the engine speed able to move it to the “R” and “P”
may not become too high even if the positions. If this happens, turn the
accelerator pedal is depressed hard. ignition switch to the “ON” position.
You will then be able to move the select
! R (Reverse) lever to the “P” position.
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the button in This position is for backing the vehicle.
: Shift while pressing the button in To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop WARNING
: Shift without pressing the button the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the “R” position. Do not drive the vehicle with the
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate ! N (Neutral) position. Engine braking has no
for using the manual mode.
This position is for restarting a stalled effect in this condition and the risk
! P (Park) engine. of an accident is consequently in-
This position is for parking the vehicle and In this position the wheels and transmis- creased.
starting the engine. sion are not locked. In this position, the
– CONTINUED –
7-20 Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
7-22 Starting and operating
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
1) Upshift indicator the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
2) Downshift indicator a downshift would push the tachometer
3) Gear position indicator needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
When the manual mode is selected, the be emitted to warn you that the down-
gear position indicator and upshift indica- Pull the “+” of the paddle shift to upshift shift is not possible.
tor and/or downshift indicator on the one level. Also pull the “−” of the paddle . If you attempt to shift up when the
combination meter illuminate. The gear shift to downshift one level. vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
position indicator shows the currently sion will not respond.
selected gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range To deselect the manual mode, return the . You can perform a skip-shift (for
(AT models) or 1st-to-6th gear range (CVT select lever to the “D” position from the “M” example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
models). The upshift and downshift indi- position. the paddle switch twice in rapid suc-
cators show when a gearshift is possible. While driving with the select lever in the cession.
When the upshift indicator “ ” is on, “D” position, if you change gears by . The transmission automatically se-
upshifting is possible. When the downshift paddle shifting, the gear position indicator lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
indicator “ ” is on, downshifting is possi- light illuminates and shows the current moving.
ble. When both indicators are on, upshift- gear condition. . If the temperature of the transmis-
ing and downshifting are both possible. sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
When the vehicle stops (for example, at OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
traffic signals), the downshift indicator Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
Starting and operating 7-23
place and let the engine idle until the Power steering Braking
warning light turns off.
& Braking tips
& Driving tips CAUTION
. On a road surface where there is a risk Do not hold the steering wheel at the
WARNING
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or fully locked position left or right for Never rest your foot on the brake
gravel-covered road), you can pull away more than 5 seconds. This may pedal while driving. This can cause
from a standstill safely and easily by first damage the power steering pump. dangerous overheating of the
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual brakes and needless wear on the
mode. The power steering system operates only brake pads and linings.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake when the engine is running.
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or If you lose power steering assist because
“R” position. ! When the brakes get wet
the engine stops or the system fails to
. Always apply the parking brake when function, you can steer but it will take When driving in rain or after washing the
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the much more effort. vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
vehicle with only the transmission. result, brake stopping distance will be
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
NOTE longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
position on an uphill grade by using the Right after the engine has been started at a safe speed while lightly depressing
“D” position. Use the brake instead. and before it has warmed up, you may the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
. The engine may, on rare occasions, hear a noise coming from areas adja- ! Use of engine braking
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- cent to the power steering pump which Remember to make use of engine braking
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. is located at the right-front area of the in addition to foot braking. When descend-
This phenomenon does not indicate a engine compartment. This noise is ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
fault. normal. It does not indicate power the brakes may start working improperly
steering system trouble. because of brake fluid overheating,
. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 2.5 L turbo or caused by overheated brake pads. To
3.6 L engine before the engine warms up. help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
– CONTINUED –
7-24 Starting and operating
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep ! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake
driving straight ahead while gradually assist system is operating properly.
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
road to a safe place. is applied by lighter force and gener-
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force.
& Brake system brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear the sound of ABS
brings more braking ability to the operating from the engine compart-
! Two separate circuits vehicle beyond its braking capabil- ment.
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake ity. Always use the utmost care
system. Each circuit works diagonally when driving regarding vehicle
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the speed and safe distance. & Disc brake pad wear warning
brake system should fail, the other half of indicators
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer CAUTION
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much When you need to brake suddenly,
longer distance will be needed to stop the continue depressing the brake pedal
vehicle. strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not It assists the brake power when the driver
turn off the engine while driving because cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
that will turn off the brake booster, result- and the brake power is insufficient.
ing in poor braking power. Brake assist generates the brake power
The brakes will continue to work even according to the speed at which the driver
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
when the brake booster completely stops depresses the brake pedal.
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
functioning. If this happens, however, you noise when the brake pads are worn.
will have to depress the pedal much NOTE
harder than normal and the braking dis- When you depress the brake pedal If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
tance will increase. strongly or suddenly, the following from the disc brakes while braking, im-
phenomena occur. However, even mediately have your vehicle inspected by
though these occur, they do not indi- the nearest SUBARU dealer.
Starting and operating 7-25
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- constant brake pedal pressure. & ABS warning light
tem) Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
WARNING
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
Always use the utmost care in wheels which may occur during sudden
driving – overconfidence because braking or braking on slippery road sur-
you are driving with an ABS faces. This helps prevent the loss of
equipped vehicle could easily lead steering control and directional stability
to a serious accident. caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
CAUTION may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
. The ABS system does not always when the ABS operates. The ABS warning light illuminates when
decrease stopping distance. You the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
The ABS system will not operate when the position and turns off after approximately 2
should always maintain a safe
vehicle speed is below approximately 6 seconds.
following distance from other
mph (10 km/h).
vehicles. This is an indication that the ABS system
. When driving on badly surfaced is working properly.
& ABS system self-check
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over deep newly fallen snow, You may feel a slight shock in the brake CAUTION
stopping distances may be long- pedal and hear the operating sound of
ABS from the engine compartment just If the warning light behaves as
er for a vehicle with the ABS
after the vehicle is started. This is caused follows, the ABS system may not
system than one without. When
by an automatic functional test of the ABS be working properly.
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and system being carried out and does not When the warning light is on, the
leave ample distance from other indicate any abnormal condition. ABS function shuts down; however,
vehicles. the conventional brake system con-
tinues to operate normally.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain . The warning light does not illu-
– CONTINUED –
7-26 Starting and operating
minate when the ignition switch voltage such as when the engine is jump Electronic Brake Force Dis-
is turned to the “ON” position. started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
tribution (EBD) system
. The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is and does not indicate a malfunction. The EBD system maximizes the effective-
turned to the “ON” position, but When the battery becomes fully charged, ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
it does not turn off even when the the light will turn off. brakes to supply a greater proportion of
vehicle speed exceeds approxi- the braking force. It functions by adjusting
mately 8 mph (12 km/h). the distribution of braking force to the rear
. The warning light illuminates dur- wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
ing driving. loading condition and speed.
If these occur, have the ABS system The EBD system is an integral part of the
repaired at the first available oppor- ABS system and uses some of the ABS
tunity by your SUBARU dealer. system’s components to perform its func-
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
NOTE used by the EBD function fails, the EBD
If the warning light behavior is as system also stops working.
described in the following, the ABS When the EBD system is operating, you
system may be considered normal. may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
. The warning light illuminates right vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
after the engine is started but turns off and does not indicate a malfunction.
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
Starting and operating 7-27
& Steps to take if EBD system warning light illuminate simultaneously, the light remains on, have the
malfunctions take the following steps. brakes inspected by a SUBARU
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, dealer immediately.
flat place. . If at all in doubt about whether
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it. the brakes are operating prop-
3. Release the parking brake. If both erly, do not drive the vehicle.
warning lights turn off, the EBD system Have your vehicle towed to the
may be malfunctioning. nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU pair.
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
the system stops working and the brake “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
system warning light and ABS warning faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest
light illuminate simultaneously. SUBARU dealer and have the system
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if inspected.
the brake system warning light and ABS 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
warning light illuminate simultaneously “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
during driving. Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more WARNING
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi- . Driving with the brake system
cle’s motion may therefore become some- warning light on is dangerous.
what harder to control. This indicates your brake system
If the brake system warning light and ABS may not be working properly. If
7-28 Starting and operating
Vehicle Dynamics Control that full vehicle control will be spare tire, the effectiveness of
system maintained at all times and under the Vehicle Dynamics Control
all conditions, its activation system is reduced and this
should be seen as a sign that should be taken into account
WARNING the speed of the vehicle should when driving the vehicle in
be reduced considerably. such a condition.
Always use the utmost care in . Whenever suspension compo-
driving – overconfidence because nents, steering components, or In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
you are driving with a Vehicle Dy- an axle are removed from a on a slippery road surface and/or during
namics Control system equipped vehicle equipped with Vehicle cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
vehicle could easily lead to a ser- Dynamics Control, have an the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
ious accident. authorized SUBARU dealer per- adjusts the engine’s output and the
form an inspection of that sys- wheels’ respective braking forces to help
tem. maintain traction and directional control.
CAUTION . Traction Control Function
. The following precautions should
. Even if your vehicle is equipped be observed in order to ensure The traction control function is designed to
with Vehicle Dynamics Control that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
system, winter tires should be trol system is operating properly. slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
used when driving on snow-cov- maintain traction and directional control.
– All four wheels should be Activation of this function is indicated by
ered or icy roads; in addition, fitted with tires of the same
vehicle speed should be reduced flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
size, type, and brand. Further- operation indicator light.
considerably. Simply having a more, the amount of wear
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- should be the same for all . Skid Suppression Function
tem does not guarantee that the four tires. The skid suppression function is designed
vehicle will be able to avoid
– Keep the tire pressure at the to help maintain directional stability by
accidents in any situation.
proper level as shown on the suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- vehicle placard attached to sideways during steering operations. Acti-
namics Control system is an the driver’s side door pillar. vation of this function is indicated by
indication that the road being flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
– Use only the specified tem-
travelled on has a slippery sur- operation indicator light.
porary spare tire to replace a
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
flat tire. With a temporary
namics Control is no guarantee
Starting and operating 7-29
NOTE trailer & Vehicle Dynamics Control
. Slight twitching of the brake pedal – when the vehicle is fitted with system monitor
may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics snow tires or winter tires
Control system operates; a small de- . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak- Control system will cause operation of light/Vehicle Dynamics Control op-
ing may also be noticed in this situa- the steering wheel to feel slightly eration indicator light
tion. These are normal characteristics different compared to that for normal
of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation conditions.
and are no cause for alarm. . Even if the vehicle is equipped with
. When driving off immediately after a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it
starting the engine, a short-lived opera- is important that winter tires be used
tion noise may be noticed coming from when driving on snow-covered or icy
the engine compartment. This noise is roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
generated as a result of a check being with tires of the same size and brand.)
performed on the Vehicle Dynamics . It is always important to reduce
Control system and is normal. speed when approaching a corner,
. Depending on the timing of activa- even if the vehicle is equipped with
tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may Vehicle Dynamics Control.
seem to jolt when you drive off after . All four wheels should be fitted with
starting the engine. This is a conse- tires of the same size, type, and brand; The light illuminates when the ignition
quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- furthermore, the amount of wear switch is turned to the “ON” position and
trol operational check and is normal. should be the same for all four tires. If turns off several seconds after the engine
. In the circumstances shown in the these precautions are not observed has started. This lighting pattern indicates
following list, the vehicle may be more and non-matching tires are used, it is that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
unstable than it feels to the driver. The quite possible that the Vehicle Dy- is operating normally.
Vehicle Dynamics Control System may namics Control system will be unable
therefore operate. Such operation does ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
to operate correctly as intended. light
not indicate a system fault.
. Always turn off the engine before
– on gravel-covered or rutted
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
roads
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
CAUTION
– on unfinished roads system unable to operate correctly.
– when the vehicle is towing a Because the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system controls each brake
– CONTINUED –
7-30 Starting and operating
through the ABS, whenever the ABS control systems. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
stops operating due to a malfunc- The warning light illuminates when the indicator light
tion in that electrical system, the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” The indicator light flashes during activa-
Vehicle Dynamics Control will also position and turns off several seconds tion of the skid suppression function and
become unable to control all four after the engine has started. This lighting during activation of the traction control
brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics pattern indicates that the Vehicle Dy- function.
Control system operation halts and namics Control system is operating nor-
the warning light illuminates. mally. NOTE
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics . The indicator light may remain illu-
Control system and the ABS will be The following situations could indicate a
minated for a while after the engine has
inoperable in this situation, it will malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
been started, especially in cold weath-
still be possible to stop the vehicle Control system. If any of these situations
er. This occurs because the engine has
using normal braking. The Vehicle occur, have an authorized SUBARU deal-
not yet warmed up and is completely
Dynamics Control system and the er carry out an inspection of the system at
normal. The light will turn off when the
ABS do not adversely affect opera- the first available opportunity.
engine has reached a suitable operat-
tion of the vehicle in any way when . The warning light does not illuminate ing temperature.
they are inoperable. However when the ignition switch is turned to the . When an engine problem occurs
should such a situation occur, drive ON position. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
with care and have an authorized . The warning light illuminates while the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates,
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspec- vehicle is being driven. the indicator light will also illuminate.
tion of those systems at the first
available opportunity. NOTE The following two situations could indicate
When the warning light turns on and off malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
in the following way, it indicates that Control system. If either of these situa-
NOTE the Vehicle Dynamics Control system tions occurs, have an authorized
. When a malfunction has occurred in is operating normally. SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical of that system at the first available
. Although illuminating after the en- opportunity.
system, only the warning light will gine has been started, the warning light
illuminate. In such an event, the ABS quickly turns off and remains off. . The indicator light does not illuminate
will still be operating normally. . The warning light illuminates when when the ignition switch is turned to the
. The warning light will also illuminate the vehicle is being driven, it then turns ON position.
when a problem occurs with the ABS or off and remains off. . The indicator light fails to turn off after
Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic the engine is started, even when several
Starting and operating 7-31
minutes have passed to allow the engine when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF indicator light on the combination
to heat up sufficiently. ON position. meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- . The indicator light does not turn off Control system will be deactivated. When
dicator light approximately 2 seconds after the ignition the switch is pressed again to reactivate
switch has been turned to the ON position. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
& Vehicle Dynamics Control light turns off.
OFF switch You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem helps prevent unstable vehicle
motion such as skidding using con-
trol of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
The light illuminates when the ignition Control system unless it is abso-
switch is turned to the “ON” position and lutely necessary. If you must turn off
turns off after approximately 2 seconds. the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
The light illuminates when the Vehicle tem, drive very carefully based on
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed Pressing the switch to deactivate the the road surface condition.
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- Vehicle Dynamics Control system can
trol system. facilitate the following operations.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
NOTE
The following two situations could indicate . When the switch has been pressed
a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system. If either should occur, Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry . extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow Control system automatically reacti-
out an inspection of that system at the first vates itself the next time the ignition
available opportunity. switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
When the switch is pressed during engine
. The indicator light does not illuminate operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control and the engine is restarted.
– CONTINUED –
7-32 Starting and operating
low pressure threshold, the low tire CAUTION Parking your vehicle
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Do not place metal film or any metal
If this light still illuminates while parts under the driver’s seat. This WARNING
driving after adjusting the tire pres- may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen- . Never leave unattended children
sure, a tire may have significant
sors, and the tire pressure monitor- or pets in the vehicle. They could
damage and a fast leak that causes
ing system will not function prop- accidentally injure themselves or
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
erly. others through inadvertent op-
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
as soon as possible.
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
When a spare tire is mounted or a NOTE ture in a closed vehicle could
wheel rim is replaced without the This device complies with Part 15 of quickly become high enough to
original pressure sensor/transmitter the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of cause severe or possibly fatal
being transferred, the low tire pres- Industry Canada. Operation is subject injuries to them.
sure warning light will illuminate to the following two conditions: (1) This . Do not park the vehicle over
steadily after blinking for approxi- device may not cause harmful inter- flammable materials such as dry
mately one minute. This indicates ference, and (2) this device must grass, waste paper or rags, as
the TPMS is unable to monitor all accept any interference received, in- they may burn easily if they come
four road wheels. Contact your cluding interference that may cause near hot engine or exhaust sys-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible undesired operation. tem parts.
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. Changes or modifications not ex- . Be sure to stop the engine if you
pressly approved by the party respon- take a nap in the vehicle. If
Do not inject any tire liquid or sible for compliance could void the engine exhaust gas enters the
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, user’s authority to operate the equip- passenger compartment, occu-
as this may cause a malfunction of ment. pants in the vehicle could die
the tire pressure sensors. If the light
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
illuminates steadily after blinking for
tained in the exhaust gas.
approximately one minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
– CONTINUED –
7-34 Starting and operating
& Electronic parking brake and contact your SUBARU deal- cause unnecessary wear on the
er. brake linings. Before starting to
drive, always make sure that the
parking brake has been released
CAUTION and the brake system warning
light has turned off.
. When the electronic parking
brake system has a malfunction Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
and the parking brake cannot be parking brake. You can apply/release the
applied, contact your SUBARU parking brake by operating the parking
dealer immediately for an inspec- brake switch.
tion. If you have to park your
vehicle in such conditions, per- To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
form the following procedure. press the parking brake switch firmly.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat To release: Pull the parking brake switch
1) Parking brake switch
location. toward you while the ignition switch is in
2) Hill Holder switch
the “ON” position and the brake pedal (all
3) Indicator light – Shift the shift lever in the “1”
models) and the clutch pedal (MT models)
or reverse position (MT mod-
are depressed.
WARNING els).
– Shift the select lever in the “P” When the parking brake is applied while
. Before exiting the vehicle, make position (AT or CVT models). the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
sure that you turn off the engine. When the select lever cannot the brake system warning light and the
Otherwise, the parking brake be shifted into the “P” posi- indicator light on the parking brake switch
may be released and an accident tion, you must release shift illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning
may occur. lock. Refer to “Shift lock func- light” F3-17.
. If the brake system warning light tion” F7-20.
NOTE
flashes, the electronic parking – Use tire stops under the tires
brake system may be malfunc- . If the parking brake switch is pulled
to prevent the vehicle from with the ignition switch in the “Acc” or
tioning. Immediately stop your moving.
vehicle in a safe location, use “LOCK” position, the parking brake is
. Never drive while the parking not released.
tire stops under the tires to brake is applied because this will
prevent the vehicle from moving . If the parking brake switch is pulled
Starting and operating 7-35
without depressing the brake pedal or . The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened. stopping on an uphill slope, depress
the clutch pedal, the parking brake is the brake pedal firmly and release it
not released. If the parking brake is automatically after the brake system warning light
. When the parking brake is being released, the brake system warning light illuminates.
applied or released, noise may be and the indicator on the parking brake . Depending on the condition of the
noticed. However, this is not a malfunc- switch turn off. road surface and braking force, the
tion. brakes operate temporarily and feel
. When the electronic parking brake
NOTE different than usual.
system has a malfunction or the elec- Even if you have applied the parking . When the electronic parking brake
tronic parking brake operation is pro- brake by pressing the parking brake system has a malfunction while the Hill
hibited temporarily, if the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be auto- Holder function is activated, a chirp
switch is operated, a chirp sound is matically released when the accelera- sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica-
heard and the brake system warning tor pedal is depressed. tor light turns off and the brake system
light flashes. ! Hill Holder function warning light flashes.
. When you cannot release the park- . The Hill Holder function does not
ing brake due to, for example, a system The electronic parking brake system has a reactivate when parking with the elec-
malfunction, you can release it by Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder tronic parking brake released after the
using the parking brake release tool. function is activated, the parking brake Hill Holder function is activated. If
Refer to “Electronic parking brake – if will be automatically applied when stop- necessary, manually apply the electro-
the electronic parking brake cannot be ping on an uphill slope with the brake nic parking brake.
released” F9-16. pedal depressed. In this case, the brake . If the seatbelt is not fastened when
system warning light and the indicator light the Hill Holder function is activated, the
! Automatic release function by gas on the parking brake switch illuminate. vehicle may not start moving smoothly
pedal from a stop, or a noise may be heard
NOTE
The electronic parking brake system has from the brake components.
an automatic release function. The park- . The Hill Holder function may not
ing brake will be automatically released by activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this ! Hill Holder switch
depressing the accelerator pedal. How- case, manually apply the electronic
ever, the automatic release function does parking brake. WARNING
not operate under the following conditions. . If you do not depress the brake
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func- When stopping on an uphill slope
. Any door (other than the trunk lid or tion may not operate properly. How-
rear gate) is open. with the Hill Holder function acti-
ever, this is not a malfunction. When vated, release the brake pedal after
– CONTINUED –
7-36 Starting and operating
the brake system warning light has . When you do not frequently use the When the Hill Holder function is activated,
illuminated. Otherwise, the Hill parking brake when stopping on an uphill the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Holder function may not operate slope Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-19.
properly and an accident may occur. ! Emergency brake
NOTE
. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
for more than 30 seconds, the Hill
CAUTION
Holder indicator light turns off, the Use the emergency brake only in
brake system warning light flashes case of an emergency. If the emer-
and the system ignores any further gency brake is excessively used,
pressing of the switch. To activate the the brake parts will wear down
switch again, turn the ignition switch to faster or the brake may not work
the “LOCK” position and restart the sufficiently due to rear wheel brake
engine. overheating.
. When the Hill Holder function is
deactivated while the Hill Holder func-
tion has a malfunction, if you press the NOTE
Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds. While using the emergency brake, the
1) Parking brake switch brake system warning light and the
2) Hill Holder switch ! Hill Holder indicator light indicator light on the parking brake
3) Indicator light switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
function by pressing the Hill Holder switch. can stop the vehicle by pressing the
parking brake switch continuously.
To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
While applying the emergency brake, the
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
brake system warning light and the in-
switch again.
dicator on the parking brake switch illumi-
Deactivate the Hill Holder function under nate and a chirp sounds.
the following conditions.
. When towing a trailer
. When carrying a heavy load
Starting and operating 7-37
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control. The cruise control indicator light on the
. driving up or down a steep grade combination meter will illuminate.
. driving on slippery or winding 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
roads vehicle reaches the desired speed.
. driving in heavy traffic
. When towing a trailer 1. Press the “CRUISE” main switch
button.
NOTE
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position. 3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
. Make sure the “CRUISE” main “SET” side and release it. Then release
Starting and operating 7-39
– CONTINUED –
7-40 Starting and operating
& To change the cruising speed ! To increase the speed (by accel- ! To decrease the speed (by the
erator pedal) “RES/SET” switch)
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch) 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the button is
pressed and the speed last time you Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph the desired speed. Then, release the
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
the desired speed. Then, release the cruise control system unit regards this will be memorized and treated as the new
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment operation as that intended to decrease set speed.
will be memorized and treated as the new the vehicle speed.
set speed. When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
When the difference between the actual
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
“SET” side quickly.
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“RES” side quickly.
Starting and operating 7-41
! To decrease the speed (by brake & Cruise control indicator light ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
pedal) dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
1. Depress the brake pedal to release by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “RES/SET” & Cruise control set indicator
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the light
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails with integrated crossbars
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 (Outback) ........................................................ 8-14
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4 Trailer hitch (Outback — if equipped) .............. 8-16
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-18
Legacy................................................................ 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-19
Outback .............................................................. 8-6 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-19
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-19
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-23
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-24 8
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) your fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
is located under the door latch on the for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to a newly installed or overhauled necessary. the engine is running. If that is
engine or when brake pads or brake . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
. The indication of the ECO gauge inlet grille free from snow, leaves
shows a reference for saving fuel. For or other obstructions to ensure
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-8. that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Driving tips 8-3
3.6 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
2.5 L non-turbo models
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
– CONTINUED –
8-4 Driving tips
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries
ter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
small amount of leaded gasoline will at all times, always have the recom- another country:
damage the catalytic converter. mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
. Never start the engine by pushing or the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.
pulling the vehicle. ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and re-
. Avoid racing the engine. formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while intervals.
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Driving tips 8-5
Driving tips for AWD vehicles power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles vehicle and may affect ride, handling,
provide better traction when driving on braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tion, and clearance between the body
WARNING when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. and tires. It also may be dangerous and
By shifting power between the front and lead to loss of vehicle control.
. Always maintain a safe driving rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to
speed according to the road and provide added traction during accelera- replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
weather conditions in order to tion, and added engine braking force original temporary spare tire stored in the
avoid having an accident on a during deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
sharp turn, during sudden brak- Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle severe mechanical damage to the drive
ing or under other similar condi- may handle differently than an ordinary train of your vehicle.
tions. two wheel drive vehicle and it contains . Always check the cold tire pressure
. Always use the utmost care in some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom-
driving – overconfidence be- purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the
cause you are driving an All- the AWD system, you should keep the tire placard, which is located on the door
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily following tips in mind: pillar on the driver’s side.
lead to a serious accident. . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you
steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle.
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
There is little difference in handling, F9-12.
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, circumference,
construction, brand, and load range as the
original tires listed on the tire placard.
Using other sizes, circumferences or
construction may result in severe mechan-
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine ical damage to the drive train of your
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving under warranty. If you do take your . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
SUBARU off road, you should review the sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
common sense precautions in the next over rough terrain.
WARNING section (applicable to the Outback) for . Slow down and employ extra caution at
general guidance. But please keep in all times. When driving off-road, you will
. Always maintain a safe driving mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil- not have the benefit of marked traffic
speed according to the road and ities are more limited than those of the lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
weather conditions in order to Outback. the like.
avoid having an accident on a Never attempt to drive through pools and . Do not drive across steep slopes.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- puddles, or roads flooded with water. Instead, drive either straight up or straight
ing or under other similar condi- Water entering the engine air intake or down the slopes. A vehicle can much
tions. the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto more easily tip over sideways than it can
. Always use the utmost care in electrical parts may damage your vehicle end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
driving – overconfidence be- and may cause it to stall. down slopes that are too steep.
cause you are driving an All- . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily & Outback cially at higher speeds.
lead to a serious accident. Because of the AWD feature and higher . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
ground clearance, your SUBARU can be steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
& Legacy please keep in mind that an AWD with your fingers and thumbs on the
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- SUBARU is a passenger car and is outside of the rim.
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain neither a conventional off-road vehicle . If driving through water, such as when
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take crossing shallow streams, first check the
primarily for on-road use. The AWD your SUBARU off-road, certain common depth of the water and the bottom of the
feature gives it some limited off-road sense precautions such as those in the stream bed for firmness and ensure that
capabilities in situations in which the following list should be taken: the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc- . Make certain that you and all of your and completely through the stream. The
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road passengers are wearing seatbelts. water should be shallow enough that it
driving conditions. Operating it under other . Carry some emergency equipment, does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-
than those conditions could subject the such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, riage. Water entering the engine air intake
vehicle to excessive stress which might wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
result in damage not eligible for repair citizens band radio. onto electrical parts may damage your
Driving tips 8-7
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never could be thrown around in the vehicle and Remember that damage done to your
attempt to drive through rushing water; cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on SUBARU while operating it off-road and
regardless of its depth, it can wash away the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s not using common sense precautions
the ground from under your tires, resulting center of gravity and make it more prone such as those listed above is not eligible
in possible loss of traction and even to tip over. for warranty coverage.
vehicle rollover. . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
. Always check your brakes for effec- from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, pedal slightly and move the select lever
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly back and forth between “D” and “R”
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
that process several times to dry out the the best possible traction, avoid spinning
brake discs and brake pads. the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. Do not drive or park over or near . When the road surface is extremely
flammable materials such as dry grass or slippery, you can obtain better traction by
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The starting the vehicle with the transmission
exhaust system is very hot while the in 2nd than 1st (both for MT, AT and CVT).
engine is running and right after the For AT and CVT models, refer to “Selec-
engine stops. This could create a fire tion of manual mode” F7-21.
hazard. . Never equip your vehicle with tires
. After driving through tall grass, mud, larger than those specified in this manual.
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, road driving. Suspension components are
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
underbody. Clear off any such matter from need to be washed thoroughly.
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
these materials trapped or adhering to the under hard-driving conditions such as
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or rough roads or off roads will necessitate
fire could occur. more frequent replacement of engine oil,
. Secure all cargo carried inside the brake fluid and transmission oil than that
vehicle and make certain that it is not specified in the maintenance schedule
piled higher than the seatbacks. During described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo nance Booklet”.
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use CAUTION
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
the vehicle. tration appropriately for the out-
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- side temperature. If the concen-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% tration is inappropriate, sprayed
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- washer fluid may freeze on the
perature varies according to how much it windshield and obstruct your
is diluted, as indicated in the following view, and the fluid may freeze in
& Operation during cold table. the reservoir tank.
weather
. State or local regulations on
Carry some emergency equipment, such Washer Fluid Con-
centration Freezing Temperature volatile organic compounds may
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, restrict the use of methanol, a
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. 30% 10.48F (−128C) common windshield washer anti-
Check the battery and cables. Cold 50% −48F (−208C) freeze additive. Washer fluids
temperatures reduce battery capacity. containing non-methanol anti-
100% −498F (−458C) freeze agents should be used
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter only if they provide cold weather
In order to prevent freezing of washer
starts. protection without damaging
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
Use an engine oil of proper grade and the table above when adjusting the fluid
or washer system.
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer concentration to the outside temperature.
oil will cause harder starting. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one ! Before driving your vehicle
Keep the door locks from freezing by used previously, purge the old fluid from Before entering the vehicle, remove any
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. the piping between the reservoir tank and snow or ice from your shoes because that
Driving tips 8-9
could make the pedals slippery and 2. Use tire stops under the tires to & Driving on snowy and icy
driving dangerous. prevent the vehicle from moving. roads
While warming up the vehicle before When the vehicle is parked in snow or WARNING
driving, check that the accelerator pedal, when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
brake pedal, and all other controls operate the glass to prevent damage to them. Do not use the cruise control on
smoothly. slippery roads such as snowy or icy
When the vehicle has been left parked
Clear away ice and snow that has after use on roads heavily covered with roads. This may cause loss of
accumulated under the fenders to avoid snow, or has been left parked during a vehicle control.
making steering difficult. During severe snowstorm, icing may develop on the
winter driving, stop when and where it is brake system, which could cause poor
safe to do so and check under the fenders
CAUTION
braking action. Check for snow or ice
periodically. buildup on the suspension, disc brakes Avoid prolonged continuous driving
! Parking in cold weather and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, engine’s intake system and may
WARNING being careful not to damage the disc hinder the air flow, which could
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- result in engine shutdown or even
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust ness. breakdown.
gases under your vehicle. Keep ! Refueling in cold weather
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and To help prevent moisture from forming in To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
from around your vehicle if you park the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
the vehicle in snow with the engine use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel speed driving, and sharp turning when
running. tank is recommended during cold weather. driving on snowy or icy roads.
Use only additives that are specifically Always maintain ample distance between
Do not use the parking brake when your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
parking for long periods in cold weather designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts to avoid the need for sudden braking.
since it could freeze in that position. To supplement the foot brake, use the
Instead, you should observe the following longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty. engine brake effectively to control the
tips. vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT If your SUBARU is not going to be used when necessary.)
models, or the select lever in “P” for AT for an extended period, it is best to have Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
models and CVT models. the fuel tank filled to capacity. vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
– CONTINUED –
8-10 Driving tips
leading to loss of vehicle control. despite wiper operation, use the defroster NOTE
with the airflow selection in “ ” and the When the season requiring non-freez-
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- temperature set for maximum warmth.
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- ing type wiper blades is over, replace
After the windshield gets warmed enough them with standard wiper blades.
mance on snowy and icy roads. For to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
information about braking on slippery using the windshield washer. Refer to
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake “Windshield washer” F3-33 & Corrosion protection
System)” F7-25 and “Vehicle Dynamics Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
Control system” F7-28. Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is & Snow tires
! Wiper operation when snowing
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
Before driving in cold weather, make sure a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the wiper blades are not frozen to the the vehicle at road side, use the hazard WARNING
windshield or rear window. warning flasher to alert other drivers. . When replacing original tires with
If the wiper blades are frozen to the Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-5. winter (snow) tires, make sure
windshield or rear window, perform the you use only the same size,
following procedure. We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the construction and load range as
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades, the original tires listed on the tire
seasons you could have snow and freez-
use the defroster with the airflow selection placard. Using other sizes and
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
in “ ” and the temperature set for construction may affect speed-
superior wiping performance in snowy
maximum warmth until the wiper blades ometer/odometer calibration and
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate clearance between the body and
are suitable for your vehicle.
control” F4-1. tires. It also may be dangerous
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper CAUTION and lead to loss of vehicle con-
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the trol.
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog- During high-speed driving, non- . You must install four winter tires
ger and deicer” F3-34. freezing type wiper blades may not that are of the same size, circum-
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the perform as well as standard wiper ferences, construction, brand,
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger blades. If this happens, reduce the and load range. Mixing other
and deicer” F3-34. vehicle speed. sizes, circumferences or con-
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts structions may result in severe
to stick on the surface of the windshield mechanical damage to the drive
Driving tips 8-11
& Vehicle capacity weight side door pillar. It includes the total weight optional equipment and trailer tongue
of the driver and all passengers and their load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
belongings, any optional equipment such pending on the situation.
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
Vehicle Weight Rating and vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating) Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Certification label Do not use replacement tires with a lower
The certification label attached to the load range than the originals because they
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
Axle Weight Rating). range than the originals do not increase
The load capacity of your vehicle is the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
determined by weight, not by available
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
cargo space. The maximum load you can
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
– CONTINUED –
8-14 Driving tips
& Roof rails with integrated the maximum load limit. Over- ! Installing carrying attachments on
crossbars (Outback) loading may cause damage to the crossbars
the vehicle and create a safety When installing any carrying attachment
hazard. such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
The bars can be used as crossbars. bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
Cargo can be carried after setting the tions and make sure that the attachment is
bars as crossbars and installing the securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. genuine SUBARU attachments. A set of
When you carry cargo on the roof using the crossbars is designed to carry loads
the crossbars and a carrying attachment, (cargo and attachment) of not more than
never exceed the maximum load limit the allowable load limit described in the
explained in the following. You should Owner’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU
also be careful that your vehicle does not carrying attachment. Before operating the
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating vehicle, make sure that the cargo is
1) Integrated crossbars (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle properly secured on the attachment.
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
NOTE
CAUTION . Remember that the vehicle’s center
refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The
. For cargo carrying purposes, the maximum load limit of the cargo and of gravity is altered with the weight of
bars must be used as crossbars carrying attachment must not exceed the the load on the roof, thus affecting the
and be used together with the allowable load limit described in the Own- driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
genuine SUBARU carrying at- er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry- avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
tachment. The bars must never ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
be used alone to carry cargo. the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly increased.
Otherwise, damage to the roof or distribute the cargo. Always properly . Restore the bars to the original
paint or a dangerous road hazard secure all cargo. position when the bars are not used
due to loss of cargo could result. as crossbars.
. When using the bars as cross-
bars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
Driving tips 8-15
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be da-
maged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar. 1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from 3. Install the bars into the holders.
The base of the bar may be the roof rail holders by pulling up the 4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
damaged. covers. securely.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
contact the roof panel or the ! How to restore bars
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be CAUTION
dented or the glass of the moon-
Do not use the bars as roof rails
roof may be damaged.
when the bars are restored.
– CONTINUED –
8-16 Driving tips
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
1. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail 3. Install the bars into the holders. tion. For possible recommenda-
holders by pulling up the covers. 4. Make sure that the latches are fitted tions and limitations, refer to
securely. “Trailer towing” F8-19.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in and safety pin for positive lock-
the illustration. ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
Driving tips 8-17
– CONTINUED –
8-18 Driving tips
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate & When you do not tow a trailer
for the ball mount and your trailer. The . Remove the ball mount from the hitch
hitch ball must be securely installed on the receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
ball mount. onto the hitch receiver tube.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. . Place the dust cap over the four-pin
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with connector of the hitch wire harness to
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s protect against possible damage.
maximum gross weight. The chains . Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
should cross under the trailer tongue to four-pin connector using terminal grease.
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight-turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let Hitch harness connector
them drag on the ground. 8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
WARNING trailer’s wire harness.
Do not connect safety chains to part 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
of the vehicle other than the safety wire harness by individually activating the
chain hooks. brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
Driving tips 8-19
Certification label
– CONTINUED –
8-22 Driving tips
trailer. Regularly check that the hitch mounting dealer and professional trailer supplier for
bolts and nuts are tight. more information about the trailer’s brake
! Outback
system.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer & Connecting a trailer
hitch is recommended. A genuine ! Trailer safety chains
SUBARU hitch is available from your ! Trailer brakes
SUBARU dealer. WARNING
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- WARNING Always use safety chains between
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- . Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its trailer without safety chains could
sional hitch supplier to assist you in create a traffic safety hazard if the
choosing an appropriate hitch for your cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight. trailer separates from the hitch due
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch to coupling damage or hitch ball
manufacturer’s instructions for installation . Do not directly connect your damage.
and use. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the to the hydraulic brake system in In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed your vehicle. Direct connection ball should break or become discon-
to handle that type of load. would cause the vehicle’s brake nected, the trailer could get loose and
For all types of hitches, regularly check performance to deteriorate and create a traffic safety hazard.
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are could lead to an accident. For safety, always connect the towing
tight. vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight chains. Pass the chains crossing each
! Legacy plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer other under the trailer tongue to prevent
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be the trailer from dropping onto the ground
hitches. Consult with a professional hitch equipped with its own brake system. in case the trailer tongue should discon-
supplier to assist you in choosing an Electric brakes or surge brakes are nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure recommended, and must be installed slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa-
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes tions into account; however, be careful not
instructions for installation and use. conform with Federal, state/province and/ to let them drag on the ground.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed For more information about the safety
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load. to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic chain connection, refer to the instructions
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU for your hitch and trailer.
– CONTINUED –
8-24 Driving tips
! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- road service to repair the flat tire.
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
increase its capacity and accommodate vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
are connected properly, please consult tire is firmly secured.
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the brake & Trailer towing tips
lights each time you hitch up.
CAUTION
! Tires
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
WARNING when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, porary spare tire is used. The tem- . When towing a trailer, steering,
check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is not designed to stability, stopping distance and
provide a good rearward field of view sustain the towing load. Use of the braking performance will be dif-
without significant blind spots. If significant temporary spare tire when towing ferent from normal operation. For
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- can result in failure of the spare tire safety’s sake, you should employ
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that and/or less stability of the vehicle. extra caution when towing a
conform with Federal, state/province and/ trailer and you should never
or other applicable regulations. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle speed. You should also keep the
! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12- following tips in mind:
5 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at
CAUTION the end of this manual. ! Before starting out on a trip
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
Direct splicing or other improper hitch mounting are in good condition. If
connection of trailer lights may proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s any problems are apparent, do not tow the
damage your vehicle’s electrical trailer.
system and cause a malfunction of specifications.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
your vehicle’s lighting system. In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial tipped sharply up at the front and down at
Driving tips 8-25
the rear, check the total trailer weight, ! Driving with a trailer
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then . You should allow for considerably more
confirm that the load and its distribution stopping distance when towing a trailer.
are acceptable. Avoid sudden braking because it may
. Check that the tire pressures are result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
correct. control.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
connected properly. Confirm that erations. If your vehicle has a manual
– the trailer tongue is connected transmission, always start out in first gear
properly to the hitch ball. and release the clutch at moderate engine
– the trailer lights connector is con- revolution.
nected properly and trailer’s brake . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s rapid lane changes. 1) Left turn
brake pedal is pressed, and that the . Slow down before turning. Make a 2) Right turn
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when longer than normal turning radius because
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- the trailer wheels will be closer than the . Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
ated. vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In takes practice. When backing up with a
– the safety chains are connected a tight turn, the trailer could hit your trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
properly. vehicle. When turning back, grip the bottom of the
– all cargo in the trailer is secured steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
safety in position. the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
– the side mirrors provide a good for a right turn.
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
rearward field of view without a sig- weather conditions or the passing of large . If the ABS warning light illuminates
nificant blind spot. trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn grip the steering wheel and slow down the trailer and have repairs performed
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination immediately but gradually. immediately by the nearest SUBARU
before starting out on a trip. In an area free dealer.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and erable distance is required because of the ! Driving on grades
backing up. added weight and length caused by . Before going down a steep hill, slow
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
– CONTINUED –
8-26 Driving tips
engine braking effect and prevent over- – “AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT and
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not CVT models)” F3-15
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the . For AT and CVT models, avoid using
air conditioner may turn off automatically the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
to protect the engine from overheating. an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
attention to the coolant temperature high
warning light (for all models) and AT OIL ! Parking on a grade
TEMP warning light (for AT and CVT Always block the wheels under both
models) because the engine and trans- vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
mission are relatively prone to overheating the parking brake firmly. You should not
under these conditions. If the coolant park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
temperature high warning light and/or the hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates, should take the following steps:
immediately turn off the air conditioner and 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe down.
location. For further instructions and addi- 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
tional information, refer to the following under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
sections.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
– “If you park your vehicle in an release the regular brakes slowly until the
emergency” F9-2 blocks absorb the load.
– “Engine overheating” F9-12
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
– “Coolant temperature low indicator apply the parking brake; slowly release
light/Coolant temperature high warn- the regular brakes.
ing light” F3-13
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” (AT and CVT models) and
shut off the engine.
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2 If no steam is coming from the engine
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-12
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3 Towing ................................................................ 9-12
Legacy................................................................ 9-4 Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-13
Outback .............................................................. 9-5 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-15
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-15
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6 Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) parking brake cannot be released................. 9-16
(if equipped)...................................................... 9-9 Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10 be opened ....................................................... 9-19
How to jump start............................................... 9-10 Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-12 cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-19
If steam is coming from the engine Moonroof – if moonroof cannot be closed ...... 9-20
compartment.................................................... 9-12
9
9-2 In case of emergency
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- . When the wear indicator appears on
porary spare tire periodically to keep the the tread, replace the tire.
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is . The temporary spare tire must be used
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare
the following precautions. tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
– CONTINUED –
9-4 In case of emergency
& Legacy 5) Tool bucket the floor cover of the trunk. The electronic
parking brake release tool is stored under
the floor of the trunk. The other tools are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-16.
& Outback 5) Tool bucket area. The electronic parking brake release
tool is stored under the floor of the cargo
area. The other tools are stored in the tool
bucket that is located in the recess of the
spare tire wheel.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” F9-6.
For the method to use the electronic
parking brake release tool, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released” F9-16.
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt nance tools” F9-3.
place. and this can result in a serious
accident. NOTE
& Changing a flat tire Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- cated before using it.
WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
incline or a loose road surface. or the select lever in the “P” (Park) position
The jack can come out of the (AT and CVT models).
jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
serious accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack. Legacy
Outback 7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the 9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat screw, and turn the handle until the tire
tire. clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
– CONTINUED –
9-8 In case of emergency
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. lbs (50 kg) at the top of the wheel nut
tire. wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel
WARNING nut wrench or a pipe extension on the
wrench because you may exceed the
Do not use oil or grease on the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
wheel studs or nuts when the spare torque checked at the nearest automotive
tire is installed. This could cause the service facility.
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
WARNING activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres-
Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate
Never place a tire or tire changing ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi-
tools in the passenger compartment example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates
after changing wheels. In a sudden a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all
stop or collision, loose equipment four road wheels. Contact your
could strike occupants and cause WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
injury. Store the tire and all tools in for tire and sensor replacement and/
If the low tire pressure warning light or system resetting.
the proper place.
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving Do not inject any tire liquid or
straight ahead while gradually redu- aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
& Tire pressure monitoring cing speed. Then slowly pull off the as this may cause a malfunction of
system (TPMS) (if equipped) road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire pressure sensors.
accident involving serious vehicle If the light illuminates steadily after
damage and serious personal injury blinking for approximately one min-
could occur. ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
Check the pressure for all four tires dealer to have the system inspected.
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- it with a spare tire as soon as
vides the driver with the warning message possible.
indicated by sending a signal from a When a spare tire is mounted or a
sensor that is installed in each wheel wheel rim is replaced without the
when tire pressure is severely low. original pressure sensor/transmitter
The tire pressure monitoring system will
9-10 In case of emergency
Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the . Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
If battery fluid is accidentally
Removing rings, watches and
swallowed, immediately drink a
ties is advisable.
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it is
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
Keep everyone including chil-
for jump starting, consult a com-
dren away from the battery.
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
In case of emergency 9-11
1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
9-12 In case of emergency
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes. 2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper
. Never use the tie-down hook using a screwdriver, and you will find a 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
closest to the muffler under the threaded hole for attaching the towing using the jack handle.
vehicle for towing purposes. hook.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
. To prevent deformation to the the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
bumper and the towing hook, do
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks. WARNING
Front towing hook: . Do not use the towing hook
1. Take out the towing hook and screw- except when towing your vehicle.
driver from the on board tool bucket. Take . Be sure to remove the towing
out the jack handle from the trunk (Le- hook after towing. Leaving the
gacy) or cargo area (Outback). towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
– CONTINUED –
9-14 In case of emergency
Rear towing hook: After towing, remove the towing hook from
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of
the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Out- WARNING
back).
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
Rear tie-down holes: WARNING properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
Use the rear tie-down holes only for care must be taken not to pull the chains
downward anchoring. If they are so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out & Towing with all wheels on the
of the holes, possibly causing a ground
dangerous situation.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
This is the best way to transport your the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle. Use the following procedures to vehicle is being towed because
ensure safe transportation. the steering wheel and the direc-
1) Rear tie-down hole
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” tion of the wheels will be locked.
The rear tie-down holes are located near position for AT and CVT models or the . Remember that the brake booster
each of the jack-up reinforcements. shift lever into “1st” for MT models. and power steering do not func-
2. Apply the parking brake firmly. tion when the engine is not
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier running. Because the engine is
– CONTINUED –
9-16 In case of emergency
turned off, it will take greater prevent damage to the vehicle. Electronic parking brake – if
effort to operate the brake pedal the electronic parking brake
and steering wheel.
cannot be released
CAUTION
WARNING
. If transmission failure occurs,
. When the electronic parking
transport your vehicle on a flat-
brake cannot be released, the
bed truck.
electronic parking brake system
. Do not run the engine while being may malfunction. Driving in such
towed using this method. Trans- conditions may cause an unex-
mission damage could result if pected accident. Contact your
the vehicle is towed with the SUBARU dealer for inspection
engine running. as soon as possible.
. For AT and CVT models, the . You can release the electronic
traveling speed must be limited parking brake by using the elec-
to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and tronic parking brake release tool
the traveling distance to less in case of an emergency. How-
than 31 miles (50 km). For greater ever, after releasing the electro-
speeds and distances, transport nic parking brake by using the
your vehicle on a flat-bed truck. electronic parking brake release
tool, contact your SUBARU deal-
1. Check the transmission and differen- er for inspection as soon as
tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the possible.
upper level if necessary. . Release the electronic parking
2. Release the parking brake and put the brake by using the electronic
transmission in neutral. parking brake release tool on a
3. The ignition switch should be in the level road. Otherwise, the vehicle
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being may move, which could cause an
towed. accident.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
In case of emergency 9-17
. When releasing the electronic . If the cap cannot be removed, 3. Make sure that the brake system
parking brake by using the elec- contact your SUBARU dealer for warning light and the indicator light on
tronic parking brake release tool, inspection. the parking brake switch have turned off.
always perform the following . After releasing the electronic 4. Use tire stops under the tires to
items. parking brake by using the elec- prevent the vehicle from moving.
– Shift the shift lever in the “1” tronic parking brake release tool, 5. Take out the electronic parking brake
or “R” position (MT models). make sure that the cap is rein- release tool. Refer to “Maintenance tools”
– Shift the select lever in the “P” stalled to the parking brake re- F9-3.
position (AT and CVT models). lease device. If the cap is not
reinstalled, water or dust enters
– Use tire stops under the tires. the device and the device may
. When releasing the electronic malfunction.
parking brake by using the elec-
tronic parking brake release tool,
make sure that the ignition NOTE
switch is in the “LOCK” position. It may be difficult to release the elec-
Otherwise, the electronic parking tronic parking brake by using the
brake system may operate and electronic parking brake release tool.
the electronic parking brake re- Have your SUBARU dealer release the
lease tool may rotate and unex- electronic parking brake if necessary.
pected accident may occur. In the event that you cannot release the
electronic parking brake by pulling the
electronic parking brake switch or by
CAUTION
depressing the accelerator pedal, you
. Under certain weather conditions can release the electronic parking brake
(rain, snow, sandstorm, etc.), do manually by using the electronic parking
not release the electronic parking brake release tool.
brake by using the electronic 1. Shift the shift lever in the “1” or “R”
parking brake release tool. If position (MT models) or the select lever in
water or dust enters the device, the “P” position (AT and CVT models).
the device may malfunction. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
– CONTINUED –
9-18 In case of emergency
wise. CAUTION
. Do not turn the electronic parking
brake release tool counterclock-
wise or turn it around more than
300 times. Doing so may result in
a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
. Do not use electric power tools to
turn the electronic parking brake
release tool. Doing so may result
in a malfunction of the electronic
parking brake.
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the Rear gate (Outback) – if the Always use a flat-head screwdriver
trunk lid cannot be opened rear gate cannot be unlocked or a similar tool.
The trunk lid can also be opened using the In the event that you cannot unlock the
key. rear gate by operating the power door
locking switches or the remote keyless
entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the cargo area.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers be-
cause doing so may cause an injury.
9-20 In case of emergency
10
10-2 Appearance care
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. & Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) Never polish just the affected area, but . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
or more between the washer nozzle and include the surrounding area as well. clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
the vehicle. Always polish in only one direction. A is left on too long, it may be difficult to
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- clean off.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained
ously. . Do not use soap containing grit to
compound. Coarser grained compounds
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
of the high temperature, high pressure with a compound, coat with wax to restore with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause a compound or an incorrect polishing washing device.
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
layer and exposing the undercoat. When num wheels) with water as soon as
& Waxing and polishing possible when it has been splashed with
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. driven on roads treated with salt or other
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and agents.
apply them according to the manufac- NOTE
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when Be careful not to block the windshield
the painted surface is cool. washer nozzles with wax when waxing
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, the vehicle.
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
10-4 Appearance care
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
The leather used by SUBARU is a high ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use leather materials may be used when
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary.
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular NOTE
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water or gasoline must never be used on
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. leather or synthetic interior materials.
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry & Climate control panel, audio
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If panel, instrument panel,
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long console panel, switches,
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended combination meter, and other
If the stain does not come out, try a
that the seats and headrests be covered, plastic surface
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use or shrinkage.
the cleaner on a hidden place and make control panel, audio equipment, instru-
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches ment panel, center console, combination
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather meter panel, and switches.
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds NOTE
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of Do not use organic solvents such as
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar cleaning agents that contain those
materials. & Synthetic leather upholstery solvents.
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
– CONTINUED –
10-6 Appearance care
Clutch pedal (MT models)................................ 11-33 Rear window wiper blade assembly
Checking the clutch function ............................ 11-33 (Outback) ...................................................... 11-45
Checking the clutch pedal free play .................. 11-34 Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) ...... 11-46
Replacement of brake pad and lining............. 11-34 Battery .............................................................. 11-47
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings........ 11-34 Fuses ................................................................ 11-48
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-35 Main fuse.......................................................... 11-50
Types of tires ................................................... 11-35 Installation of accessories .............................. 11-50
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-50
(if equipped)................................................... 11-35 Headlight......................................................... 11-50
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-37 Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-53
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-37 Front position light .......................................... 11-53
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-39 Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-53
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-39 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-54
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-40 Tail/Back-up light (Outback) ............................. 11-56
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-40 License plate light ........................................... 11-57
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-41 Dome light....................................................... 11-58
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-41 Map light ......................................................... 11-59
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-42 Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-59
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-42 Door step light................................................. 11-60
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-43 Cargo area light (Outback) ............................... 11-60
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-44 Trunk light (Legacy) ......................................... 11-60
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-44 Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-60
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids & Before checking or servicing & When checking or servicing
in your eyes. If something does in the engine compartment in the engine compartment
get in your eyes, thoroughly (2.5 L non-turbo models)
wash them out with clean water. WARNING
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat- . Always stop the engine and set
belt pretensioner system, or at- the parking brake firmly to pre-
tempt to take its connectors vent the vehicle from moving.
apart, as that may activate the . Always let the engine cool down.
system or it can render it inop- Engine parts become very hot
erative. NEVER use a circuit when the engine is running and
tester for these wiring. If your remain hot for some time after
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- the engine is stopped.
sioner needs service, consult . Do not spill engine oil, engine
your nearest SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the CAUTION
ignition switch. When the ignition
Do not contact the belt cover while
switch is in the “ON” position,
checking the components in the
the cooling fan may operate
engine compartment. Doing so may
suddenly even when the engine
cause your hand to slip off the belt
is stopped.
cover and result in an unexpected
. Before performing any servicing injury.
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system tem-
porarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
Maintenance and service 11-5
! Type B clips
! Type C clips
Type C clips
Type A clips Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
Type B clips
Maintenance and service 11-7
– CONTINUED –
11-8 Maintenance and service
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
– CONTINUED –
11-10 Maintenance and service
Engine oil conditions, you should check the oil & Checking the oil level
level at least at every second fuel fill-up Check the engine oil level at each fuel
time, and change the oil more fre- stop.
quently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more de- 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
tails. stop the engine. If you check the oil level
. If the oil consumption rate seems just after stopping the engine, wait a few
abnormally high after the break-in minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
period, for example more than 1 quart pan before checking the level.
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. When the engine low oil level warn-
ing light illuminates, have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
determined until the vehicle has tra- and insert it again.
veled at least several thousand miles
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
inserted until it stops with the graphic
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
symbol “ ” on its top appearing as
ing conditions such as those men-
shown in the illustration.
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un-
der normal driving conditions. If you
drive your vehicle under these severe
Maintenance and service 11-13
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
upper level when the engine is cold.
. In 2.5 L engine models, the level
2.5 L models 3.6 L models gauge has a notch above the upper
1) Notch 1) Full level level. Just after driving or while the
2) Full level 2) Low level engine is warm, the engine oil level
3) Low level reading may be in a range between the
4. Pull out the level gauge again and
upper level and the notch mark. This is
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
caused by thermal expansion of the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
engine oil.
the upper level.
CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
– CONTINUED –
11-14 Maintenance and service
3.6 L models
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
2.5 L non-turbo models warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
Maintenance and service 11-15
& Recommended grade and In choosing an oil, you want the proper
viscosity quality and viscosity, as well as one that
will add to fuel economy. The following
CAUTION table lists the recommended viscosities
and applicable temperatures.
Use only engine oil with the recom- When adding oil, different brands may be
mended grade and viscosity. used together as long as they are the
same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Oil grade:
– ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified
with the ILSAC certification mark (Star-
burst mark)
– or API classification SM with the words ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
“ENERGY CONSERVING”
& Recommended grade and Cooling system shortened to that of the mixing
viscosity under severe driv- coolant.
ing conditions . Do not splash the engine coolant
WARNING over painted parts. The alcohol
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in
areas with very high temperatures, or contained in the engine coolant
Never attempt to remove the radia-
used for heavy-duty applications such as may damage the paint surface.
tor cap until the engine has been
towing a trailer, use of oil with the following shut off and has cooled down
grade and viscosities is recommended. completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
API classification SM or SL: serious burns from a spray of boil- nections
SAE viscosity No.: ing hot coolant when the cap is Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50 removed. fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
CAUTION If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the coolant temperature high
. Vehicles are filled at the factory warning light illuminates, the cooling fan
with SUBARU Super Coolant that circuit may be defective. Check the fuse
does not require the first change and replace it if necessary. Refer to
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 “Fuses” F11-48 and “Fuses and circuits”
years/220,000 km). This coolant F12-6. If the fuse is not blown, have the
should not be mixed with any cooling system checked by your SUBARU
other brand or type of coolant dealer.
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
life of the coolant. Should it be sary, there may be a leak in the engine
necessary to top off the coolant cooling system. It is recommended that
for any reason, use only the cooling system and connections be
SUBARU Super Coolant. checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
– CONTINUED –
11-18 Maintenance and service
1. Remove the under cover. drain plug and loosen the drain plug. Coolant capacity (guideline):
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the 2.5 L non-turbo models:
coolant from the radiator. Then drain the MT: 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the
CVT: 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
drain plug securely.
2.5 L turbo models:
4. Install the under cover.
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
3.6 L models:
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
2.5 L models coolant when adding it. If coolant
1) Drain plug touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
1) Fill up to here it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to
over painted parts. The alcohol
just below the filler neck, allowing enough
contained in the engine coolant
room to add genuine SUBARU cooling
may damage the paint surface.
system conditioner in the radiator. Add
genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
tioner until the coolant level reaches the
filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too
quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air
3.6 L models bleeding and trapped air in the system.
1) Drain plug
& Replacing the air cleaner to the top of the air cleaner case.
element 3. Loosen the screw of the clamp.
Replace the air cleaner element according 4. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
to the maintenance schedule in the cleaner case cover.
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! Non-turbo models
1. Remove the air intake duct (except 3.6
L models). For the method to remove the
air intake duct, refer to “Removing air
intake duct” F11-7. 7. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case cover into the slits on the
air cleaner case and then snap the two
5. Open the air cleaner case cover and clips on the air cleaner case cover.
remove the air cleaner element.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
1) Connector
2) Clamp
3) Clips
– CONTINUED –
11-22 Maintenance and service
! Turbo models 3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner Spark plugs
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element. It may be difficult to replace the spark
4. Snap the two clamps on the air cleaner plugs. It is recommended that you have
case cover. the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
– CONTINUED –
11-24 Maintenance and service
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and Be careful not to spill front differ-
stop the engine. ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, touches the exhaust pipe, it may
and insert it again. cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Maintenance and service 11-27
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
– CONTINUED –
11-28 Maintenance and service
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill rear differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If
rear differential gear oil touches
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Avoid spilling fluid when adding
it in the tank.
– CONTINUED –
11-30 Maintenance and service
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir Brake fluid . When adding brake fluid, be care-
tank. ful not to allow any dirt into the
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has & Checking the fluid level reservoir.
been run: Check that the oil level is . Never splash the brake fluid over
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on WARNING painted surfaces or rubber parts.
the surface of the reservoir tank. Alcohol contained in the brake
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is . Never let brake fluid contact your fluid may damage them.
run: Check that the oil level is between eyes because brake fluid can be
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the harmful to your eyes. If brake
when adding it. If brake fluid
surface of the reservoir tank. fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
3. If the fluid level is lower than the ately flush them thoroughly with
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom- clean water. For safety, when
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
mended fluid as necessary to bring the performing this work, wearing
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line. eye protection is advisable.
off.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
indicate possible leakage. Consult your from the air. Any absorbed moist- Check the fluid level monthly.
SUBARU dealer for inspection. ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
& Recommended fluid . If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
Use one of the following types of auto- you suspect a problem, have the
matic transmission fluid. vehicle checked at your SUBARU
– SUBARU ATF dealer.
– IDEMITSU ATF HP
– “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis- CAUTION
sion Fluid
. Never use different brands of
brake fluid together. Also, avoid
mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake 1) “MAX” level mark
fluids even if they are of the same 2) “MIN” level mark
brand.
Maintenance and service 11-31
Check the fluid level on the outside of the Clutch fluid (MT models) . Never splash the clutch fluid over
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add painted surfaces or rubber parts.
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. & Checking the fluid level Alcohol contained in the clutch
Use only brake fluid from a sealed fluid may damage them.
container. WARNING . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch fluid
& Recommended brake fluid Never let clutch fluid contact your touches the exhaust pipe, it may
eyes because clutch fluid can be cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
them thoroughly with clean water. off.
For safety, when performing this
CAUTION work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if CAUTION
they are the same brand.
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU 1) “MAX” level mark
dealer. 2) “MIN” level mark
. Never use different brands of
clutch fluid together. Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
. When clutch fluid is added, be mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
careful not to allow any dirt into to “MAX” level mark.
the tank.
– CONTINUED –
11-32 Maintenance and service
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed Brake booster is applied by lighter force and gener-
container. ates a greater braking force.
If the brake booster does not operate as . You might hear the sound of ABS
& Recommended clutch fluid described in the following procedure, have operating from the engine compart-
it checked by your SUBARU dealer. ment.
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake 1. With the engine off, depress the brake Brake assist is not a system that brings
fluid pedal several times, applying the same more braking ability to the vehicle
pedal force each time. The distance the beyond its breaking capability.
pedal travels should not vary.
CAUTION 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 slightly down to the floor.
brake fluids even if they are of the 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
same brand. the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
Maintenance and service 11-33
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function
free play Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage.
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
1) 0.08 – 0.18 in (2 – 5 mm) the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
– CONTINUED –
11-34 Maintenance and service
& Checking the clutch pedal Replacement of brake pad you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
free play pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
and lining soon as possible.
Tires and wheels or icy roads, we strongly recommend the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
use of winter (snow) tires. extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
& Types of tires When installing winter tires, be sure to every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
replace all four tires. the temperature in the garage and the
You should be familiar with type of tires
temperature outside. By way of example,
present on your vehicle. ! Winter (snow) tires
the following table shows the required tire
! All season tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on pressures that correspond to various out-
snow-covered and icy roads. However side temperatures when the temperature
The factory-installed tires on your new
winter tires do not perform as well as in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
vehicle except 2.5 L turbo models are all
summer tires and all season tires on roads Example:
season tires.
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
All season tires are designed to provide Tire size: P215/70R16 99S, P225/60R17
an adequate measure of traction, handling 98T
& Tire pressure monitoring
and braking performance in year-round Standard tire pressures:
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
driving including snowy and icy road Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do The tire pressure monitoring system pro- Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
not offer as much traction performance as vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads. installed in each wheel when tire pressure Adjusted pressure
All season tires are identified by “ALL is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the temperature
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on Front Rear
the tire sidewall. vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 308F (−18C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3)
! Summer tires tire pressure (for example, a blow-out 37 35
The factory-installed tires on your new 2.5 108F (−128C) (255, 2.55) (240, 2.4)
caused by running over a sharp object).
L turbo models are summer tires. Summer
tires are high-speed capability tires best If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm −108F 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)
(−238C)
suited for highway driving under dry garage and will then drive the vehicle in
conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire Example:
pressures may cause the low tire pressure Tire size: P205/60R16 91V, P215/50R17
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this 90V, P225/50R17 93V, 225/45R18 91W
on slippery roads such as on snow-
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
covered or icy roads. Standard tire pressures:
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered pressures higher than those shown on the Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
– CONTINUED –
11-36 Maintenance and service
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) or by an increase in the temperature in the WARNING
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off. If the low tire pressure warning light
Adjusted pressure does not illuminate briefly after the
Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] System resetting is necessary when the
temperature wheels are changed (for example, a ignition switch is turned ON or the
Front Rear light illuminates steadily after blink-
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) valves are installed on the newly fitted ing for approximately one minute,
wheels. Have this work performed by a you should have your Tire Pressure
38 37
108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55) SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- Monitoring System checked at a
ment. SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
−108F 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7) ble.
(−238C)
It may not be possible to install TPMS If this light illuminates while driving,
If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the never brake suddenly and keep
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in market. Therefore, if you change the driving straight ahead while gradu-
cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part pull off the road to a safe place.
tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment Otherwise an accident involving
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed wheels. Without four operational TPMS serious vehicle damage and serious
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS personal injury could occur.
see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate If this light still illuminates while
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire driving after adjusting the tire pres-
pressure warning light does not go off, the steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute. sure, a tire may have significant
tire pressure monitoring system may not damage and a fast leak that causes
be functioning normally. In this event, go When a tire is replaced, adjustments are the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system necessary to ensure continued normal a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
inspected as soon as possible. operation of the tire pressure monitoring as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there- When a spare tire is mounted or a
tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed wheel rim is replaced without the
the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer. original pressure sensor/transmitter
the low tire pressure warning light, any being transferred, the low tire pres-
increase in the tire pressures caused by sure warning light will illuminate
an increase in the outside air temperature steadily after blinking for approxi-
Maintenance and service 11-37
NOTE . Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
. The air pressure in a tire increases evenly) worn at shoulders)
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher.
cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower.
Maintenance and service 11-39
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread & Wheel balance & Wear indicators
worn in center) Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation. 1) New tread
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire 2) Worn tread
magnifies the effects of road-surface NOTE 3) Tread wear indicator
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in Loss of correct wheel alignment*
vehicle damage. causes the tires to wear on one side Each tire incorporates a tread wear
and reduces the vehicle’s running indicator, which becomes visible when
WARNING stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer the depth of the tread grooves decreases
if you notice abnormal tire wear. to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
Driving at high speeds with exces- replaced when the tread wear indicator
sively low tire pressures can cause *: The suspension system is designed to hold appears as a solid band across the tread.
the tires to deform severely and to each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- the other wheels and to the road) for optimum WARNING
crease in temperature could cause straight-line stability and cornering perfor-
tread separation, and destruction of mance. When a tire’s tread wear indicator
the tires. The resulting loss of becomes visible, the tire is worn
vehicle control could lead to an beyond the acceptable limit and
accident. must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
– CONTINUED –
11-40 Maintenance and service
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-
ularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.
In areas where water freezes in winter, the concentration of the fluid remaining in Replacement of wiper blades
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer the piping is too low for the outside
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid temperature, it may freeze and block the Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% nozzles. on the windshield or the wiper blade
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- results in jerky wiper operation and streak-
perature varies according to how much it CAUTION ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the
is diluted, as indicated in the following streaks after operating the windshield
table. . Adjust the washer fluid concen-
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
tration appropriately for the out-
clean the outer surface of the windshield
Washer Fluid Freezing side temperature. If the concen-
Concentration Temperature
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
30% 10.48F (−128C) washer fluid may freeze on the
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
windshield and obstruct your
50% −48F (−208C) cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
view, and the fluid may freeze in
blades with clean water. The windshield is
100% −498F (−458C) the reservoir tank.
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
. State or local regulations on the windshield with water.
volatile organic compounds may
CAUTION restrict the use of methanol, a CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids . Do not clean the wiper blades
fluid because it could cause paint
containing non-methanol anti- with gasoline or a solvent, such
damage.
freeze agents should be used as paint thinner or benzine. This
only if they provide cold weather will cause deterioration of the
In order to prevent freezing of washer
protection without damaging wiper blades.
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades . When you wish to raise the
concentration to the outside temperature. or washer system. passenger-side wiper arm, first
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with raise the driver-side wiper arm.
a different concentration from the one Otherwise, the passenger-side
used previously, purge the old fluid from wiper assembly and driver-side
the piping between the reservoir tank and wiper assembly will touch each
washer nozzles by operating the washer other, possibly resulting in
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if scratches.
– CONTINUED –
11-44 Maintenance and service
. Return the passenger-side wiper & Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub-
arm to its original position before sembly ber
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the 1) Support
wiper arm or scratch the wind- 1) Open the cover
shield. 2) Pull down the wiper blade
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even 2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by stoppers on the rubber are free of the
after following this method, replace the opening the cover and pulling it down in support.
wiper blades using the following proce- the direction shown in the illustration.
dures. 3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Maintenance and service 11-45
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade & Rear window wiper blade
rubber assembly into the support until it assembly (Outback)
locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
1) Metal spines
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber (Outback) the plastic support.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
One is located under the instrument panel
when charging the battery because
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
it will shorten battery life.
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
Maintenance and service 11-49
The other one is housed in the engine The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
compartment. box in the engine compartment.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. We recommend that you have
the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs 5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
3. Disconnect the electrical connector. spring securely.
1. Pull off the fender lining. For details, 6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
refer to “Pulling off the fender lining” F11- 7. Install the bulb cover.
7.
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction
(left-hand side).
! Outback
1) Brake/tail and rear side marker light 4. Slide the rear combination light as-
2) Rear turn signal light sembly straight rearward and remove it
3) Back-up light 1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
from the vehicle.
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-6.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear 2. Remove the cover.
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Securely lock the cover against the
trunk trim.
– CONTINUED –
11-56 Maintenance and service
1) Tail and rear side marker light 8. Reinstall the rear combination light
2) Brake light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
3) Rear turn signal light
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
of the combination light assembly securely light cover as shown in the illustration, and
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear to each holder of the vehicle side. pry the light cover off from the rear gate
combination light assembly by turning it trim.
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
– CONTINUED –
11-60 Maintenance and service
& Door step light 4. Reinstall the lens. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
& Cargo area light (Outback) 4. Reinstall the lens.
12
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Legacy Outback
Item
2.5 L non-turbo 2.5 L turbo 3.6 L 2.5 L non-turbo 3.6 L
Drive system AWD
Transmission type MT CVT MT AT MT CVT AT
Overall length 186.4 (4,735) 188.2 (4,780)
Overall width 71.7 (1,820) 71.7 (1,820)
Overall height
59.3 (1,505) 66.1 (1,680)*2
65.7 (1,670)*3
Wheelbase 108.3 (2,750) 107.9 (2,740)
Tread Front 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550) 61.6 (1,565) 61.0 (1,550)
Rear 61.8 (1,570) 61.2 (1,555) 61.8 (1,570) 61.0 (1,550)
Ground clearance*1 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220)
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 EJ255 EZ36D
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo) (3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 222 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.62 6 3.59 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4 1–6–3–2–5–4
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications
& Capacities
Fuel tank 18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
Engine oil 2.5 L models 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.6 L models 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 3.9 US qt (3.7 liters, 3.3 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (CVT) 13.2 US qt (12.5 liters, 11.0 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
Front differential gear oil (AT and CVT models) 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 2.5 L non-turbo models MT 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
CVT 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
3.6 L models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
Specifications 12-5
& Tires
Tire size P205/60R16 P215/70R16 P225/60R17 P215/50R17 P225/50R17 225/45R18
91V 99S 98T 90V 93V 91W
Wheel size 16 6 6 1/2JJ
16 6 6 1/2J 16 6 6 1/2JJ 17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J 18 6 7 1/2J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa) 33 psi (230 kPa)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa) 30 psi (210 kPa) 32 psi (220 kPa)
Temporary spare Size T135/80R16 T145/80R17 T135/70R17
tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa)
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications
A) Main fuse
Specifications 12-9
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Specifications 12-11
– CONTINUED –
12-12 Specifications
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load
Tire information .................................................. 13-2 capacities ...................................................... 13-14
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on
handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-14
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-15
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-7
Tire care – maintenance and safety Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-15
practices........................................................ 13-11 Treadwear ....................................................... 13-16
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-11 Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-16
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-16
Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-17
13
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
maged, repaired, retreaded, week, starting with “01” to represent
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
or otherwise altered from the first full week of the calendar
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
their original condition. If year; the second two figures repre-
WARNING tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
treaded, or otherwise al- means the 1st week of 2001.
Load indices apply only to the
tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle table for original equipment The following makings are also
does not mean the vehicle can tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated speeds.
! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “350 kpa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in- . Extra load tire
. Accessory weight flated, bears the load. A tire designed to operate at higher
The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking loads and higher inflation pressure
those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the than the corresponding standard
replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall. tire.
sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure . Groove
power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been The space between two adjacent
and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been tread ribs.
items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more. . Innerliner
stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the face of a tubeless tire that contains
. Bead tire. the inflating medium within the tire.
The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation . Innerliner separation
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent The parting of the innerliner from
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds. cord material in the carcass.
the rim. . Cracking . Intended outboard sidewall
. Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side- (1) The sidewall that contains a
A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire whitewall, bears white lettering
components in the bead. extending to cord material. or bears manufacturer, brand,
. Bias ply tire . Curb weight and/or model name molding that
A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with is higher or deeper than the
cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the same molding on the other side-
laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and wall of the tire, or
less than 90 degrees to the center- (2) The outward facing sidewall
coolant, and if so equipped, air
line of the tread. of an asymmetrical tire that has
conditioning and additional weight
. Carcass a particular side that must al-
optional engine.
The tire structure, except tread and ways face outward when mount-
– CONTINUED –
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation . Tread rib
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des- A tread section running circumfer-
heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code. entially around a tire.
trim. . Rim width . Tread separation
. Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim Pulling away of the tread from the
A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges. tire carcass.
cords that extend to the beads are . Section width . Treadwear indicators (TWI)
laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the The projections within the principal
the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an grooves designed to give a visual
. Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations indication of the degrees of wear of
sure due to labeling, decoration, or the tread.
The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands. . Vehicle capacity weight
mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall The rated cargo and luggage load
. Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead. vehicle’s designated seating capa-
loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation city.
sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com- . Vehicle maximum load on the
dard tire. pound from the cord material in tire
. Rim the sidewall. Load on an individual tire that is
A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim determined by distributing to each
and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for axle its share of the maximum
tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed loaded vehicle weight and dividing
. Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire. by two.
Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread . Vehicle normal load on the tire
. Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes Load on an individual tire that is
Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road. determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
– CONTINUED –
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
accessory weight, and normal oc- Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
cupant weight (distributed in accor- various designated seating capacities
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section) Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
and dividing by 2. capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel 2 through 4 2 2 in front.
and tire assembly securely during 2 in front, 1 in second
5 through 10 3 seat.
testing.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
& Tire care – maintenance and rear tires on the left-hand side of The total load capacity includes the
safety practices the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept total weight of driver and all pas-
. Check on a daily basis that the on its original side of the vehicle.) sengers and their belongings, any
tires are free from serious damage, Replace any damaged or unevenly cargo, any optional equipment such
nails, and stones. At the same time, worn tire at the time of rotation. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
check the tires for abnormal wear. After tire rotation, adjust the tire carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
. Inspect the tire tread regularly pressures and make sure the wheel a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
and replace the tires before their nuts are correctly tightened. For can be calculated by the following
tread wear indicators become visi- information about the tightening method.
ble. When a tire’s tread wear torque and tightening sequence
indicator becomes visible, the tire Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
for the wheel nuts, refer to “Flat
is worn beyond the acceptable limit weight of occupants + total weight
tires” F9-6.
and must be replaced immediately. of optional equipment + tongue
With a tire in this condition, driving & Vehicle load limit – how to load of a trailer (if applicable))
at even low speeds in wet weather determine For towing capacity information and
can cause the vehicle to hydro- The load capacity of your vehicle is weight limits, refer to “Trailer tow-
plane. Possible resulting loss of determined by weight, not by avail- ing” F8-19.
vehicle control can lead to an able cargo space. The load limit of
accident. your vehicle is shown on the
. To maximize the life of each tire vehicle placard attached to the
and ensure that the tires wear driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
uniformly, it is best to rotate the statement “The combined weight
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). of occupants and cargo should
Rotating the tires involves switch- never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
ing the front and rear tires on the on your vehicle’s placard.
right-hand side of the vehicle and The vehicle placard also shows
similarly switching the front and seating capacity of your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Calculating total and load ca- occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
figurations kg).
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
2. Calculate the available load ca- is indicated on the vehicle placard 2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity. with the statement “The combined pacity.
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
3. The total weight now exceeds kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37 with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
kg), so the cargo weight must be (10 kg), to which is attached a be carried.
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more. trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). Example 2B
Example 2A 10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
– CONTINUED –
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate. available amount of cargo and Uniform tire quality grading
. Heavy and/or high-mounted luggage load capacity. For exam- standards
loads could increase the risk of ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
rollover. 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be This information indicates the rela-
. Stopping distance will increase. five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tive performance of passenger car
. Brakes could overheat and fail. your vehicle, the amount of avail- tires in the area of treadwear,
. Suspension, bearings, axles and able cargo and luggage load capa- traction, and temperature resis-
other parts of the body could break city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6 tance. This is to aid the consumer
or experience accelerated wear 150) = 650 lbs). in making an informed choice in the
that will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight purchase of tires.
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded Quality grades can be found where
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not applicable on the tire sidewall be-
. Tire could separate from its rim. tween tread shoulder and maxi-
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu- mum section width. For example:
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit lated in Step 4. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
6. If your vehicle will be towing a perature A
1. Locate the statement “The com-
trailer, load from your trailer will be
bined weight of occupants and The quality grades apply to new
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
cargo should never exceed XXX pneumatic tires for use on passen-
this manual to determine how this
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. ger cars. However, they do not
reduces the available cargo and
2. Determine the combined weight apply to deep tread, winter type
luggage load capacity of your ve-
of the driver and passengers that hicle. snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
will be riding in your vehicle. ary use spare tires, tires with
3. Subtract the combined weight of nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
the driver and passengers from or less, or to some limited produc-
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. tion tires.
4. The resulting figure equals the
All passenger car tires must con-
– CONTINUED –
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
& Treadwear mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
The treadwear grade is a compara- dards No. 109. Grades B and A
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING represent higher levels of perfor-
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law.
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, WARNING
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this
1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire
ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics. that is properly inflated and
The relative performance of tires not overloaded. Excessive
depends upon the actual conditions speed, underinflation, or ex-
of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa-
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi-
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure.
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
& Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material
grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-17
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Index
14
14-2 Index
P Recommended
Parking ..................................................................... 7-33 Automatic transmission fluid................................... 11-25
Brake ................................................................... 7-34 Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-31
Tips...................................................................... 7-37 Clutch fluid .......................................................... 11-32
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Engine oil ................................................... 11-16, 11-17
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-2 Front differential gear oil........................................ 11-27
Pocket ........................................................................ 6-8 Manual transmission oil ......................................... 11-24
Power Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-30
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-7 Rear differential gear oil ........................................ 11-28
Seat ....................................................................... 1-4 Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-22
Steering ................................................................ 7-23 Refueling.................................................................... 7-3
Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-29 Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-10
Window ................................................................ 2-21 Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-8
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-24, 1-64 Replacement
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7 Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-34
Printed antenna ........................................................... 5-2 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-43
Replacing
R Air cleaner element............................................... 11-21
Rear Battery (remote engine start transmitter) .................... 7-14
Combination lights................................................. 11-54 Battery (remote keyless entry system)....................... 2-11
Differential gear oil ................................................ 11-27 Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-12
Gate............................................................. 2-27, 9-19 Replacing bulbs ....................................................... 11-50
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-54 Back-up light (Legacy) .......................................... 11-54
Rear seat.................................................................... 1-7 Brake light (Outback) ............................................ 11-55
Folding down........................................................... 1-8 Brake/Tail and rear side marker light (Legacy).......... 11-54
Reclining................................................................. 1-8 Cargo area light ................................................... 11-60
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-19 Dome light ........................................................... 11-58
Rear window Door step light ..................................................... 11-60
Defogger............................................................... 3-34 Front fog light....................................................... 11-53
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-34 Front position light ................................................ 11-53
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-45 Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-53
Index 14-9
Headlight ............................................................. 11-50 Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
License plate light ................................................. 11-57 Indicator light .................................................. 2-4, 3-22
Map light.............................................................. 11-59 Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-19
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-54 Select lever ............................................................... 7-19
Tail and rear side marker light (Outback).................. 11-55 Position indicator .................................................... 3-22
Tail/Back-up light (Outback) .................................... 11-56 Shift lock function ................................................... 7-20
Trunk light............................................................ 11-60 Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-19
Vanity mirror light .................................................. 11-59 Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-14
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11 Snow tires ....................................................... 8-10, 11-35
Roof rails with integrated cross bars............................. 8-14 Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10
S Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-22
Safety Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Precautions when driving ............................................. 4 Speedometer .............................................................. 3-6
Symbol ...................................................................... 2 SRS
Warnings ................................................................... 2 Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-53
Seat Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-43
Fabric................................................................... 10-5 Side airbag ............................................................ 1-53
Front ...................................................................... 1-2 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-38
Heater .................................................................... 1-6 SRS airbag system
Height adjustment .................................................... 1-4 Monitors ................................................................ 1-62
Rear....................................................................... 1-7 Servicing ............................................................... 1-63
Seatbelt ................................................................. 4, 1-12 Warning light.......................................................... 3-11
Fastening.............................................................. 1-15 Starting the engine ...................................................... 7-8
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-22 State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-6
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-22 Steering wheel
Safety tips............................................................. 1-12 Power ................................................................... 7-23
Warning light and chime ................................. 1-14, 3-10 Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-38
Security Stopping the engine.................................................... 7-10
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-16 Storage compartment................................................... 6-5
ID plate................................................................... 2-3 Sun shade................................................................. 2-30
14-10 Index
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
3
13
12
4
11
10
5
9
7 8
6 000134
GAS STATION REFERENCE
& Fuel: & Fuel capacity:
! Non-turbo models 18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or & Engine oil:
higher.
Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY
! Turbo models CONSERVING” or ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark).
AKI or higher. For temporary purposes if premium unleaded
gasoline is not available, you may use regular unleaded For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to the following
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. For optimum sections.
engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use . “Recommended grade and viscosity” F11-16
premium grade unleaded gasoline. . “Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving
conditions” F11-17
& Fuel octane rating & Engine oil capacity:
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti 2.5 L models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” F7-2 section in this manual. 3.6 L models: 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)